JP2023142538A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing manufacturing costs.SOLUTION: A main control board and a game value control board are housed in board cases each, multiple marks printed on a main control board are configured so as to be capable of specifying each different inherent information in the inside of a game machine, a beltlike member is allowed to set a state in which inherent information can be read individually each or a state in which it cannot be read individually each, and the first mark can specify inherent information showing a first manufacturer and the second mark can specify inherent information showing a second manufacturer.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachi-slot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventionally, a control board for controlling gaming operations in a gaming machine is housed in a transparent board case and installed inside it to prevent fraud, and it is not easy to identify it in that state. For example, it is required to display unique identification information (board management information) including the name of the manufacturer of the game machine, its model name, etc.

In such gaming machines, the main body of the control board is provided with multiple identification information display sections with different identification information printed on them, and by making it possible to selectively separate the identification information display sections other than the necessary identification information display sections, usage patterns can be improved. A system has been proposed that can display only identification information according to the following (see, for example, Patent Document 1). According to the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the same control board can be used between different models, so it is possible to increase its versatility and reduce manufacturing costs.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-68112

By the way, in recent years, in order to further reduce manufacturing costs and to take environmental issues into account, gaming machines that have been installed in game arcades are collected and replaced with components that do not have any operational problems. There is a desire to reuse them in new gaming machines. However, as described above, since the control board is required to display unique identification information, it is difficult to reuse such a control board. For example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, even if there is room for selection at the time of initial shipment, the same problem will still occur after the selected identification information is displayed and shipped. That is, there is a need for a way to easily change the identification information already displayed on the control board.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce manufacturing costs.

In order to achieve the above object, the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A gaming machine comprising a main control board (for example, main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a gaming value control board (for example, a medal number control board) that controls the management of gaming value,
The main control board is installed inside the gaming machine while being housed in a transparent main control board case, and has a plurality of codes printed at visible positions in that state,
The gaming value control board is installed inside the gaming machine while being housed in a transparent gaming value control board case different from the main control board case,
The plurality of codes are each configured to be able to specify different unique information, and each of the unique information can be individually made readable or unreadable by a band-like member,
A first code included in the plurality of codes can specify the unique information indicating a first manufacturer,
A second code included in the plurality of codes is characterized in that the unique information indicating the second manufacturer can be specified.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to improve the reusability of the main control board and reduce its manufacturing cost.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

It is a diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the internal structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the mode of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a carryover combination storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of an operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a press order storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing medal reception/start check processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a process at the start of a game during an advantageous period, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing reel stop control processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing processing at the end of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing periodic interrupt processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an overview of sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming machine in which a main control board according to another example is mounted. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game information display unit, a medal number display unit, and a medal lending display unit provided in a gaming machine in which a main control board according to another example is mounted. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a main control board and a main control board case concerning another example. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the main control part and medal number control part of the main control board based on another example. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the main control microprocessor of the main control board concerning another example, and the medal number control microprocessor. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a circuit configuration example of a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an IC that can be mounted on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a circuit pattern of a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a circuit pattern of a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a circuit pattern of a main control board according to another example. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of electronic components that cannot be used on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of electronic components that cannot be used on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a dip component that can be mounted on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of a dip component that can be mounted on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an example of mounting board management information on a main control board of a conventional gaming machine. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a first example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a first example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a second example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a second example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a third example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a third example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a fourth example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a fourth example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of printing on a rewritable film on a main control board according to another example.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Note that FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, for convenience of explanation, in the following explanation of the external structure, a part of the internal structure may be explained, and in the explanation of the internal structure, a part of the external structure may be explained.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes a housing 2 in the shape of a rectangular box. The housing 2 also includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD placed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and an upper door mechanism UD placed at the lower front of the cabinet G. It has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that in FIGS. 1 and 2, illustration of the rear wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 is omitted. Furthermore, two openings G4a are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and penetrating in the vertical direction. A wooden plate member G4b is attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

Note that the plate member G4b is used to fix the pachislot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when it is installed in a game parlor, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, metal or resin materials can be used. Alternatively, it can be formed integrally with the upper wall G4. Furthermore, as long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component may be made of wood or resin.

Furthermore, inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space with the intermediate support plate G1 in between, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. There is. The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and houses a main display device 210, which will be described later, and the like. Further, the lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board 71, etc., which will be described later.

Note that the cabinet G does not necessarily need to be configured to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device etc. is appropriately accommodated within the cabinet G, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper space and the lower space are not partitioned. Moreover, the cabinet G can be simply called a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as a "body frame", It can also be referred to as a "support body", "support frame", or "fixed frame".

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable, for example, by an opening/closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Note that either one of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is configured to be able to be opened and closed by the above-mentioned opening/closing mechanism, and the other is configured to be detachable only when one of the door mechanisms is in an open state. You can also do that.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided in the center thereof, and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows visual confirmation of an effect image displayed on a screen device C that constitutes a main display device 210, which will be described later, provided on the back side of the effect display window UD1. In addition, in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays effects via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display section 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided approximately at the center of the upper part thereof, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G on the back side of the main display window 4. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the circumferential surface of the reel body. symbols) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the rotation direction of the reels. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each reel can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is configured as a transparent panel made of resin, for example, and allows at least some (for example, three) of the symbols on the circumferential surface of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visually recognized. Furthermore, inside each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, a light source (a reel lamp included in lamps and LEDs to be described later) is provided at least at a position where the symbols are visible from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, When 3C and 3R are rotating, they are illuminated from inside with a constant brightness to ensure the visibility of the symbols.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display section 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4, and a effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub effect display section 22 displays an effect image displayed on a sub display device 220, which will be described later. Note that the sub effect display section 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a function of displaying effects but also as one of the buttons for effects. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that receives a performance operation (performance operation) from the player.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in the substantially horizontal pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, with the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, and settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and the settlement button 9 provided approximately in the center. It has a presentation button 10a and a medal slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b are used to perform game operations (bet operations) by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the Pachislot machine 1. This is the operation section that accepts the commands (which can also be referred to as "", etc.). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number (for example, 3 medals) and the number of medals credited is greater than the difference, the maximum bet number of medals will be bet. Ru. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than the difference, no medals are bet. Further, when the 1 bet button 6b is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The payment button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a game operation (payment operation) by the player to return (payment) the credited medals. In addition, if the payment button 9 is operated when there are no medals credited, the credit for the medals to be inserted or paid out is within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). It may also be possible to accept a player's gaming operation (C/P mode selection operation) to enable selection of either mode (C mode) or pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited. That is, the payment button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The performance button 10a is an operation unit that receives a performance operation (performance operation) from the player.

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. The accepted medal is detected by a selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not it is an appropriate medal. If one of the accepted medals is not proper, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later. Furthermore, if the accepted one medal is a proper one and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current bet number is the maximum bet number and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned pedestal. The information display device 14 includes a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information regarding the game depending on the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD includes a start lever 7 provided on the left side below the pedestal, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R provided approximately in the center, and a start lever 7 provided on the right side. It has a locking mechanism 15. The start lever 7 is an operation section that is attached to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range and receives a game operation (start operation) from the player to start the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation section that accepts a game operation (stop operation) by a player to stop the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state, an administrator of the game parlor (for example, a clerk of the game parlor, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole. ) is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and the lower door mechanism DD becomes open. Note that the locking mechanism 15 may have not only the function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism but also the function of a reset switch. For example, if the manager of the game parlor inserts a door key into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later. Further, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be It is also possible to provide separate mechanisms so that opening and closing can be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also includes a waist panel 13 provided at the center of the lower part, a medal tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal payout port 11 provided above the medal tray 12. , sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 11.

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source (such as a lamp or LED described later) for illuminating this decorative panel from the back side. Consists of a lumbar lamp (included). The medal receiver 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. The medal payout port 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. Note that the medals discharged from the medal dispensing port 11 include those dispensed from a hopper device 32 (described later) and those returned from a selector 31 (described later) through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are located on the back side of each of the speakers 35a and 35b (the symbol of the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) installed on the inside of the cabinet G to output sounds such as sound effects and BGM. is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Note that in this embodiment, an upper door mechanism UD and a lower door mechanism DD are provided in response to the fact that the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be constructed as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. Moreover, it can also be configured as a double door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door) in the front-rear direction. In addition, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can also be simply referred to as a "door" or "door", and since they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G, they can be referred to as "opening/closing members" or "doors". It can also be referred to as a "door member" or a "door member."

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R starts rotating when the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), driving and controlling stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R, which will be described later. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is operated (when a stop operation is performed by the player), stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later, are drive-controlled for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. This stops each rotation. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 are variable display units (means) that can variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols in multiple rows, or variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols. ) configuring a plurality of possible variable display units (means). Note that the variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)", a "variable display section (means)", etc. Further, the symbols can be referred to as "pictures", "patterns", etc., and can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense, since any information that can be visually identified by the player is sufficient.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured such that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols for each reel are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions of each column (3 symbols in total) (3 rows x 3 columns within the frame of the main display window 4). (The design is displayed in this manner.) Note that the main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as a "symbol display area" or a "window section."

Furthermore, an effective line is defined in the main display window 4. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not a prescribed combination of symbols has been displayed when symbols in all rows have been stopped and displayed in response to a stop operation by the player. In this sense, the active line can also be referred to as a "winning line", a "judgment line", etc. Further, the effective line is configured as a line that connects any one of the regions in each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a manner of 3 rows x 3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 valid lines. However, in reality, one or more of the lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the middle area of the reel 3R is the "center line," and the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the top area of the reel 3C, and the top area of the reel 3R is the "center line." The connecting line is the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line that connects the upper area is called a "cross-up line," and the line that connects the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called a "cross-down line." Since the line connects each region in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as the effective line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line that connects each area of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the active line to be activated, the medals required for the current game (the number of medals available for starting the game) must be bet before the player starts the operation. The number of active lines displayed may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the three lines mentioned above are defined as the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line", then in the case of the former, the number of bets is either 1 to 3. ``Centerline'', ``Topline'', and ``Bottomline'' are enabled even if On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" will be activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" will be activated, and if the number of bets is 3 (maximum bet number), the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are enabled.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display section has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, so that 3 rows x 3 Although the symbols are displayed in a column format, the symbol display format in the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is 1, 2, or 4 or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each row is 1, 2, or 4 or more. You can also display the design with . Furthermore, in this case, the number of definable effective lines is also increased or decreased as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable display section displays the symbols in a variable manner by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub display device 220 described later, or it may be configured using other display devices (for example, organic EL or 7-segment LED). . Alternatively, for example, a configuration using other physical devices (eg, a belt, etc.) may be used. Further, the arrangement, size, etc. of the variable display section can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display section functions as a main side display section directly related to the game, which is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described below. A variable display section may be provided as a sub-display section that is controlled by a sub-display section that is related to performances that are not directly related to games. Note that the sub-side display section can be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220. In other words, a variable display section that displays symbols in a variable manner in response to a player's start operation (or other start conditions are met), and that stops and displays symbols in response to a player's stop operation (or other stop conditions are met). In addition to the main side display section, a sub side display section may also be provided. In this case, in order for the player to be able to identify whether the variable display section is directly related to the game or not, the words "Kyokudou" or "Main Reel" are displayed near the main side display section. It is sufficient to attach an identification display in which is displayed to make it possible to identify that the variable display section is the main display section. Note that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal slot 5 that receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. Note that the medal slot 5 and the selector 31 (to be described later) have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b, so such an insertion operation is , for example, can also be referred to as a bet operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal slot 5 is a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

In addition, in this embodiment, the use of medals as game media is explained as an example of the game value used in the game or given according to the game result, but the game value used in this way is It is not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, etc. can also be used. Further, the gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "gaming value".

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operating sections as operating sections that can be operated by a player. Note that each operation section shown below is just an example, and the configuration may include a different operation section, or the configuration may not include operation sections that are not necessarily essential. .

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1 bet button 6b that accept a bet operation by a player to use medals deposited (credited) therein. Further, such a bet operation is detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's bet operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1 bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button for betting two medals may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the start lever 7 that accepts a player's start operation to start the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection section (means) that can detect the player's start operation. Note that the start lever only needs to be able to detect the player's starting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are provided corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and which accept a stop operation by a player to stop the rotation of each reel. Moreover, such a stop operation is detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R and stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player. Note that the stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Payment button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the settlement button 9 that accepts the player's settlement operation (return operation) to return (settlement) the credited medals. Further, such a payment operation is detected by a payment switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the payment button 9 and the payment switch 9S constitute a payment operation detection unit (means) that can detect the payment operation by the player. Note that the payment button only needs to be able to detect the player's payment operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Performance button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes performance buttons 10a and 10b that accept performance operations from the player. Note that such presentation operations are detected by detection switches (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective presentation buttons. Therefore, the performance buttons 10a, 10b and the detection switch constitute a performance operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the performance operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the player's effect operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is also possible to configure the system without providing either of them, or to provide only one of them. can. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more presentation buttons are provided.

The main uses of the presentation buttons include changing the presentation mode when executing a specific presentation (for example, operation-linked presentation described below), and performing selection/decision operations in the user menu described below. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so that buttons for effects are provided depending on the purpose. For example, it is assumed that the presentation buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the above-mentioned touch panel may be used for the latter purpose. Note that for use in the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like that can accept selection/decision operations as another presentation button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout port]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal payout port 11 for discharging medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. In addition, when a winning occurs and medals are paid out, the medal payout port 11 is for giving the player the medals paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It can also be said that it is part of the means. Further, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout port can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-7. Medal saucer]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) that can store the awarded game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a waist panel 13 that includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically shows the type of pachislot machine 1 in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, but for example, the waist panel 13 itself can be By configuring it with an image display device or the like, it can be configured as one of the performance execution means that can execute the performance.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information regarding the game depending on the lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display section (means) that can display information regarding games.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp indicates that medals can be inserted by lighting up. By lighting up, the start lamp indicates that the game can be started in conjunction with the operation of the start lever 7. When lit, the replay lamp indicates that medals have been automatically inserted due to the replay operation. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of credited medals depending on the lighting mode. The number of payout lamps display the number of medals (number of payouts) that have been paid out according to game results depending on the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (status display section). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the player is notified of the information on the stop operation (for example, in an AT state), thereby providing information on the stop operation. Display. Note that "an aspect that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" refers to, for example, the press order (in this embodiment, this may be referred to as "batting order"), "1st (the first stop operation When notifying the press order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", display the numerical value "1" on the instruction monitor. The number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)" is notified, the number "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. It is about. Note that the notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, information on the stop operation may be displayed using either a credit lamp or a payout number lamp.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display section 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later, In addition, information on the stop operation is also notified by an instruction monitor as a main notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100, which will be described later. Note that the mode of notification in the main side notification means and the mode of notification in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notification means only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to specify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means may directly notify information about the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main effect display section 21 may directly notify instruction information for causing the reels 3L to perform the first stop operation.

Further, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in an advantageous section, which will be described later. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (described later), the section lamp lights up at any timing until the start of the game in the advantageous section, and then when the advantageous section ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. In this case, the light is turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game in the non-advantageous section is started. Note that the lighting timing of the section lamps is not limited to this. For example, when first transitioning from a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section (normally advantageous section) to an increased section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section, any arbitrary period until the game in the increased section starts. It may also be something that lights up at the right time. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the section is in an advantageous section, regardless of whether it is a production section or an increase section, or at least an advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section. It may also be possible to report the period until the end of the period.

Further, the limit lamp indicates that a limit process, which will be described later, has been executed or the possibility thereof, depending on its lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the light is turned on to notify the player that the advantageous state (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, when the limit process is about to be executed, the light blinks to indicate that there is a high possibility that the advantageous state will be forcibly terminated by the limit process. In addition, other information related to the limit process can be reported as appropriate by providing other triggers for turning on, blinking, or turning off the light.

[1-1-10. Performance display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the main effect display section 21 and the sub-effect display section 22 that display effect images. The main performance display section 21 and the sub-performance display section 22 constitute a performance display section (means) capable of displaying a performance. Moreover, it is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from a visual viewpoint to the player.

The main performance display section 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays a performance via the performance display window UD1. The main display device 210 also includes a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display. It is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with light. In this embodiment, by configuring the main display device 210 in this way, sophisticated and powerful effect display is possible, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is sufficient if it is possible to provide a visual effect to the player, and it may be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL device, a 7-segment LED device, etc., or a display device such as a sub-reel, etc. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in the case where the pachi-slot machine 1 is mainly designed to provide entertainment based on so-called rolls, the main effect display section 21 may not be provided (sub-effect display section 22 as well).

The sub effect display section 22 is configured to include a sub display device 220. Further, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Note that, like the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can also be configured as another image display device or a display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, since the main performance display section 21 is configured with a large screen, it mainly displays performances closely related to the current game, such as push order notification, winning notification, continuous performance, etc., and the sub performance display section 22 is composed of a small screen, so it is possible to display the display contents separately depending on the purpose, such as mainly displaying effects that are not closely related to the current game, such as game history etc. It is possible. In addition, in this embodiment, the main effect display section 21 and the sub effect display section 22 are configured to be provided, but it is also possible to configure without providing either of these sections. It is also possible to configure so that only one of them is provided. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more effect display sections are provided.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1, like the upper lamp 23 mentioned as an example, has a light emission mode (not only lighting, flashing, or turning off, but also the brightness and color of the light when configured as a full-color LED). ) is equipped with one or more lamps (light emitting means) that can perform effects. Moreover, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from a visual viewpoint to the player. In addition, from such a viewpoint, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end surfaces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end surfaces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation sections provided in each operation section. Examples include lamps and the like. Note that the latter includes a function that informs the player whether or not each operation part can be operated, so when such a function is activated, the light emission mode does not change depending on the content of the performance. , it can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission mode.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sounds such as sound effects and BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute audio output means that can produce effects by outputting audio. Moreover, it is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from an auditory viewpoint to the player. In addition, from such a viewpoint, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with production devices other than the various production devices (production execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to perform a performance by providing a performance device such as a movable performance device such as a so-called role model, a vibration performance device that performs a performance using vibration, or an air performance device that performs a performance by jetting air. In other words, a performance device that can execute a performance that appeals to any of the player's five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (allows the player to recognize that the performance is being performed). If so, you can use any of them. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" means, unless otherwise specified, using any one or more of the above-mentioned various performance devices (direction execution means) to perform a performance. This indicates that it may be executed.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (number omitted in FIG. 2) is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 includes, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects a medal inserted from the medal slot 5 and determines whether the detected medal is an appropriate medal. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal and the medal is in a state where it can be accepted, the sorting device transfers the medal to the hopper device 32, which will be described later. The drive is controlled so that it is guided. Note that in this case, 1 is added to the number of bets or the number of credits. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, and when the medal cannot be accepted, the sorting device passes the medal through the cancellation chute to the medal payout port 11. The drive is controlled so that it is returned from. If an abnormality occurs in medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam) is removed, the error state will be canceled.

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection section (means) that can detect the inserted game medium. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a determining means capable of determining whether or not the inserted gaming medium is appropriate. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a distributing means that stores the inserted game media internally when it is appropriate, and discharges it to the outside when the inserted game medium is not appropriate. Furthermore, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 includes, for example, a bucket section that stores medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and is provided at the bottom of the bucket section, and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section. It has a disk section that guides medals one by one to a discharging section, a discharging section that discharges medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharging section.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Medals exceeding a certain number are guided to a medal auxiliary storage 33, which will be described later, through a guide path provided on the top side. Note that when the medals stored in the bucket section become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, if a reset operation is performed after replenishing medals, the error state will be canceled.

The disk part has a plurality of medal-shaped hollow parts formed radially from the center, and when the central shaft is rotationally driven in accordance with a drive signal, the medals fitted in the hollow parts are guided one by one to the ejection part. Note that the medals stored in the bucket section are stirred by the rotation of the disk section. Further, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam) is removed, the error state will be canceled.

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when dispensing one medal, the disc part starts rotating, and then stops rotating in response to the count sensor counting the dispensing of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game media payout unit (means) that can pay out game media. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is part of a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to a player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary medal storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 includes, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage that is provided near the storage section and detects the capacity of medals stored in the storage section. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage unit to at least a certain number, the error state will be canceled.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game media storage section (means) that can store surplus game media. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 includes, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. Note that the power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, similar to household electrical appliances. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) that can supply necessary power to the gaming machine. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting key type switch 52 and the reset switch 53, which will be described later, are provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case, which will be described later). It is also possible to configure the power supply device 34 to include a switch.

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as necessary for various controls. Note that each of the substrates shown below is merely an example, and the structure may include a different substrate, or the structure may not include substrates that are not necessarily essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the back side of the reel unit RU within the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that performs control related to games, and is located inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or nearly transparent) so that its status can be visually recognized. is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

Note that there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and it is basically configured by DIP mounting various electronic components, but some or all of the various electronic components may be SMT mounted (surface mounting). It may also be configured by implementing (implementing). Further, in this case, a test point may be provided for checking the operation using a tester or an oscilloscope. Moreover, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for some or all of the various electronic components. Further, the board surface of the main control board 71 may be configured to have multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached within the cabinet G to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1. The sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls effects, and is housed in a sub-control board case (not shown) made of resin. Note that the sub-control board case can be constructed as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or it can be constructed of another material that is opaque (or nearly opaque). It can also be configured as a case using . The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (symbol omitted in FIG. 2) is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is connected to various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main controller. This is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a separate board from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, so all functions of the main relay board 73 can be controlled as the main control board unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the main relay board 73 is not provided and is placed on the board 71. Further, from this point of view, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is installed between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and This is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Note that the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a separate board from the sub-control board 72 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, so all functions of the sub-relay board 74 can be performed as a sub-control board if there is no particular problem. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the sub-relay board 74 is not provided and is placed on the board 72. Further, from this point of view, the sub relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as sub-relay substrates.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower space), and receives signals such as a medal input signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Note that the output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be set as appropriate, and the transition of the internal state of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the bonus state or AT state) can be set externally according to the playability. It makes it possible to report. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display device or hall computer, these devices can be used to check not only the status of medal insertion and payout and the occurrence of errors in the pachislot machine 1. , it is possible to recognize such internal state transitions.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the test machine in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1. (Please note that the pachi-slot machine 1 as a release product for sale is not equipped with these relay boards, so the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 301 for the test machine. Various electronic components required to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, test signals for controlling the main operations related to the game (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and are also determined by the main control board 71. Test signals and the like related to the pressed order navigation are outputted via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained. Note that FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. Main control board 71 and main relay board 73, main relay board 73 and sub-relay board 74, and sub-relay board 74 and sub-control board 72 are electrically connected, respectively. The main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other via the main relay board 73 and the sub-control board 74 so as to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72. connected.

A main control circuit 100 as a game control section that controls games is mounted on the main control board 71. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by execution of a control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signals. Furthermore, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from among the generated random numbers as necessary. In this way, control related to the overall gaming operation is performed.

A sub-control circuit 200 is mounted on the sub-control board 72 as an effect control section that controls effects. The sub control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, a ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 includes various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, and various presentation data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc.). Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub-RAM 203 includes a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by execution of a control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, etc. provided. Note that the random number value for the performance may be generated and extracted within the sub CPU 201 from random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or the main control The generation and extraction may be performed by providing a random number circuit similar to the circuit 100. Alternatively, a sub-ROM may be included in the sub-control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs etc. may be stored in the sub-ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various performance data, and the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub control circuit 200 includes a microprocessor (for example, also referred to as "VDP") dedicated to images, such as a GPU, which allows images to be displayed on the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220. It may be configured to generate (edit).

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, a setting key type switch 52, a reset switch 53, a role ratio monitor device 54, an external centralized terminal board 55, a hopper device 32, a medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and a power supply. A device 34 is electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 is electrically connected to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, payment switch 9S, and information display device 14 via the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. Note that, if the first interface board 301 for a test machine and the second interface board 302 for a test machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

In addition, the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, payment switch 9S, information display device 14, testing machine Since the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted here.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R are connected to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears each having a predetermined reduction ratio, and are driven to rotate and stop the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Note that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, so the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51R, The number of times a pulse is outputted to 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is managed based on the count result. Furthermore, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for performing such management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index. .

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, 6 levels of settings 1 to 6) (setting change), or when checking the settings of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). used for. Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player regarding the game, and usually, the lower the setting value (for example, the closer to setting 1), the relative degree of advantage the player has. The higher the setting value (for example, the closer it is to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player becomes. The setting key-type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator at the game parlor inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position from the counterclockwise position. and turns off. Note that when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered off, turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power will enable settings to be changed, and the settings can be changed while the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on. When the key-type switch 52 is turned on, settings can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by an administrator at the game parlor. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. Further, the reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a setting value determination operation by a manager at the game parlor in a state where settings can be changed. Note that when the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where settings can be changed, the setting value increases by 1 each time it is operated (when setting 6 is reached, the setting returns to setting 1). In this way, the setting value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. In other words, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting a setting value confirmation operation by the administrator of the game parlor. In this way, when changing the settings, turn on the setting key type switch 52, operate the reset switch 53 to select the setting value, and operate the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and the configuration may be such that the setting change can be performed by other operations. Furthermore, when changing or confirming settings, the current setting value may be displayed on the above-mentioned credit lamp or payout number lamp, for example.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is composed of, for example, a four-digit seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the main control board case. The winning ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information regarding the game that has been aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information are used by the game parlor manager when checking whether the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with or not. Note that the role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71 or on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. You can. Further, as long as it is within the cabinet G, it may be provided at another location. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Furthermore, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching its contents may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the above-mentioned various ratio information will be displayed. good. Furthermore, on the premise that such a management switch is used, the information display device 14 may also be used as the role ratio monitor device 54, for example. Immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds, which serves as a buffer considering the time required to start up the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200), the role ratio monitor device 54 In order to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning properly, use a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs light up). It is desirable to have a configuration in which the light is turned on (or blinks) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous character ratio information and character ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous character ratio information. There is also information on the proportion of accessories.

Specific section ratio information refers to the stop operation that is advantageous to the player within the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative"; 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games"; the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games played (or may simply be the number of games played during an advantageous period) in the game period (for example, AT state) in which the information was reported. In addition, continuous accessory ratio information refers to the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation (the consecutive bonuses related to the first-class special bonus) This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the first class special bonus (RB) in a state where the operating device (BB) is operating (including during the operation of the first class special bonus (RB)). In addition, the accessory ratio information indicates that among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, the first type special bonus (RB), the second type special bonus (CB), and the normal bonus (SB) ) is the information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB), and here, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation, the first-class special bonus (RB) is operated by the continuous operation device for the first-class special bonus (RB). This concept includes the state in which the first type special accessory (RB) is in operation while the second type special accessory (CB) is in operation. This concept includes the operation of the second type special accessory (CB) in a state where the accessory continuous operation device (MB) according to the above is in operation.

Note that the game period in which information on stop operations advantageous to the player was being reported (for example, AT state) is considered to be when the accessory is in operation or when the accessory continuous operation device is in operation, and the respective percentage information is It can also be subject to aggregation and calculation. That is, the role ratio monitoring device 54 may be any device that appropriately displays necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. For example, when displaying continuous accessory ratio information on a model that is not equipped with the first class special accessory (RB), or when displaying specific section ratio information on a model that is not equipped with an advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (correspondence information), when displaying the item, the last two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio). On the 7-segment LED, for example, by displaying an identification display for non-compatible information, such as lighting up two vertical bars in the center, such as "--", it is possible to confirm that the model does not have compatible information. It is desirable that the user can recognize the information at a glance.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. Note that it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may also be configured to be provided with a similar door opening/closing monitoring switch. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, and turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, thereby monitoring the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD. Note that when the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on, a door opening error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the lower door mechanism DD is brought into the closed state.

A ROM cartridge board 202, a main display device 210, and a sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. In addition, the sub control board 72 is connected via the sub relay board 74 to a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as the performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps/LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and speakers 35a and 35b. A group of speakers such as the following are electrically connected.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, presentation button group, lamps/LEDs, and speaker group have already been described, so their description will be omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56. Note that it is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has the function of monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by allowing such monitoring to be performed on the sub control circuit 200 side as well, the lower door mechanism DD can be further improved. The opening/closing history of the door mechanism DD can be saved for a certain period of time. Note that this opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the game being opened after the manager of the game parlor has left after business hours, or if there is a history of the game being opened and closed for a long time during business hours, this may result in fraudulent activity. It is now possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that an act has been committed.

[3. Pachislot machine function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (performs a bet operation) and operates the start lever 7 (performs a start operation), a random number from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is selected. One random number (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number") is extracted.

An internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process to be described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the active line are determined in advance. In addition, the types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where the player is given benefits such as medal payout, replay activation, bonus activation, etc., and those related to other so-called "losing". Such things are provided. Furthermore, the winnings related to the payout of medals are called "small winnings", the winnings related to the activation of replays are called "replay winnings", and the winnings related to the activation of bonuses (bonus status) are called "bonus winnings". to be called. Furthermore, a winning combination that can be internally won (that is, a combination of symbols that is permitted to be realized) is sometimes simply referred to as a "winning combination." Further, the internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination," "predetermined result," or "derivation permissible condition." Further, the internal lottery means is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination determining means", "winning combination determining means", "advance determining means", or "derivation permissible condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player operates the stop button (stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reel (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described below) The main CPU 101) that performs reel stop control processing performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed (or the order in which the stop button is pressed). Note that the operating means for performing the starting operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, but any operating means may be used as long as the player can perform the starting operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to button-shaped ones such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, but any operation that allows the player to perform the stop operation may be used. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, control is basically performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reels rotate within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces." In this embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that permits the display of winning symbol combinations is determined, the reel stop control means normally causes the symbol combination to appear on the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (4 symbols). Stop the reel rotation so that it is displayed as much as possible at the top. Further, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations whose display is not permitted due to the internal winning combination are not displayed on the active line. Note that the symbols displayed when the reels stop rotating are sometimes referred to as a "stop display" or a "display result." Furthermore, displaying symbols when the rotation of the reels stops is sometimes referred to as "deriving a stop display" or "deriving a display result."

The reel stop control means also includes an automatic reel stop control means that automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the reels have rotated, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. Stop control may also be performed. In this case, the reels will stop without the player's stop operation, so even if any internal winning combination has been determined, any combination of winning symbols will be valid. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reels so that they are not displayed along the line.

In this way, when the rotation of all the plurality of reels is stopped, the winning determination means (the main CPU 101 that performs winning operation determination processing described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is related to winning. (or some other predetermined value). That is, it is determined whether or not a winning combination of symbols (or other predetermined symbol combination) has been established. The displayed symbol combination is determined by the winning determination means to be a winning symbol (or other predetermined symbol combination) (i.e., a winning symbol combination (or other predetermined symbol combination) ) is established, benefits such as payout of medals are given to the player, or various controls are performed using this as an opportunity. In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the above-described series of games is played as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means merely determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the active line corresponds to any one of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols corresponds to an internal winning combination determined by an internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols is related to a winning combination or not, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately performs the stop control, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the occurrence of erroneous winnings, so it is possible to reduce the control burden related to erroneous winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter case, by making it possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a combination of symbols that is permitted to win, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a combination of symbols that is permitted to win. can be detected, which makes it possible to improve security.

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, images are displayed on a display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220, etc.), and light is emitted by various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.). Various effects are performed using the output of the sound, the output of sound from the speakers (for example, the speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are performance execution means that execute the performance. The content of the performance executed by the performance execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or may be determined on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can serve as a performance content determining means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for performance is extracted separately from a random number value for internal lottery. When the random number value for production is extracted, the production content determining means determines the production to be executed this time from among the multiple types of production content associated with the internal winning combination (or according to predetermined conditions). decide.

Next, when the performance content is determined by the performance content determining means, the performance execution means executes a corresponding performance in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reels start rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when determining whether or not there is a prize. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing the performance contents associated with the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at, the order of pressing to be performed, etc.) is determined. The player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict whether or not he or she can do the same, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to play a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable and static manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp which symbol is placed at which position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores at least data for identifying the type of symbol at each symbol position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Note that, as long as such an objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is used as an example.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotational direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. Furthermore, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, a symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". Note that the number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. can be changed and defined as appropriate.

[4-2. Design combination]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols influences the game result. That is, the pachislot machine 1 grants various benefits, transitions from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or transitions from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of displayed symbols. This makes it possible to migrate. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such symbol combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such combinations of symbols is defined in the main ROM 102. Note that as long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14), which will be described later, is used as an example. ing.

In the symbol combination table, data indicating the types of predetermined symbol combinations among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line (for example, "display combination" or "winning activation flag") is defined. ing. Note that the symbols constituting each symbol combination can be specified using, for example, the above-mentioned symbol code. Furthermore, data indicating the type of bonus (for example, "payout, etc.") is associated with each symbol combination. The symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. Note that the number of types of symbol combinations, the content of benefits, etc. can be changed and defined as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that which symbol combinations are allowed to be displayed (determined in advance) influences the game result. That is, the Pachislot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combinations that can be displayed (or the types of benefits that can be awarded)) prior to (in advance) the player's stop operation. It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such an internal winning combination is defined in the main ROM 102. Note that various data configurations can be adopted as long as such an objective is achieved, but in this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is used as an example.

The internal lottery table includes data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values for determining each internal winning combination in each gaming state. is defined. Note that the lottery value may vary depending on the set value. Further, types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding to) are associated with each internal winning combination. In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed? is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the later-described internal lottery process of this embodiment (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a numerical value range predetermined by the random number circuit (for example, 0 65535) are sequentially added and updated with the lottery values defined corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether the lottery result has overflowed or not). Then, in a predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is made to win (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if no winning combination exceeds 65535 even after making this determination for all internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination in the current game will be a "lose". Note that this is just an example of internal lottery processing, and as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability), various methods can be used for the lottery processing. For example, the extracted random numbers are updated by sequential subtraction with the lottery values specified corresponding to each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (the lottery result underflows) is updated. The internal winning combination may be determined by determining the internal winning combination.

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the probability that an internal winning combination with a larger prescribed lottery value is determined (winning probability) becomes higher. Note that the winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "Lottery value specified for each winning number/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As mentioned above, in the pachislot machine 1, the game result is determined by which symbol combination is finally displayed by the player's stop operation among the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed based on the determination of the internal winning combination. It is a specification that affects the. In other words, the Pachislot machine 1 determines the final display based on not only the determined internal winning combination type but also the player's stop operation timing and press order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be displayed. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp the manner in which the stop control is to be performed for each internal winning combination according to the manner in which the player performs the stop operation. For this reason, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying the mode of such stop control. Note that as long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, as an example, a stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown), etc. are used. There is.

In the stop table, data indicating the movement amount of symbols (for example, "number of sliding pieces") is defined for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, assume that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Next, it is assumed that a stopping operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Assume that in the predetermined stop table, the number of sliding pieces specified by the symbol position data "0" is "4". Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at the symbol position moved by four symbols (the position of the symbol position data "4") (the scheduled stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table defines data (the number of sliding pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that such a data structure is also just an example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control."

The attraction priority table contains data indicating which symbol combination should be preferentially displayed (drawn) when there are multiple symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (for example, "Attraction priority order"). ”) are stipulated. For example, assume that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination allows the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table is set such that symbol combination B is displayed preferentially than symbol combination A. It is assumed that the order of priority is specified. Next, it is assumed that a stopping operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position is "0".

Then, the main control circuit 100 determines whether the symbols constituting symbol combination A and the symbols constituting symbol combination B are different for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position. Search to see if it exists. If both symbols are not present, the position to stop is determined according to predetermined rules (for example, to stop at a closer position, to stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination A, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination B, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, symbol combination B is displayed preferentially than symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at a position corresponding to the symbols constituting symbol combination B. In addition, the pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions while the target reel is rotating, or when a stop operation is performed on the target reel, according to the selected pull-in priority table. When the symbol is moved, each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position may be stored. Moreover, such a data structure is also just an example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control."

In addition, in this embodiment, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "table control", or a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "control control". Alternatively, first, perform "table control" to temporarily determine the stopping position, then perform "control control" to search for a more suitable stopping position, and change the stopping position depending on the search results. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes stop control that enables this.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the active line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (the lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "lost", the combination of symbols related to any replay role, the combination of symbols related to the minor role, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus role ultimately falls on the active line. It will never be displayed. It should be noted that the "loss" can be considered as one of the internal winning combinations, or it can be taken as a lottery result in which no internal winning combination has been determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbol (the pressed position) when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set at four symbols, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, display is permitted. If the symbols constituting a symbol combination are arranged over four symbols on an active line (or each active line if there are multiple symbols), depending on the timing of the player's stop operation, the combination of symbols may be may not be displayed. This is what is called a "missing point."

The third element is the player's press order (the order in which the player operated the stop button). For example, in this embodiment, there are cases where an internal winning combination is determined in which a combination of multiple symbols is associated, and in this case, the combinations of symbols are finally displayed on the active line according to the order in which the symbols are pressed. The combination of symbols may change. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a ``push order'', and if it is a replay win, it is sometimes called a ``push order replay'', and if it is a small win, it is called a ``push order small win''. It is sometimes called.

[4-5. Game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage for the player or to achieve the intended playability. An example of the gaming state will be explained below.

[4-5-1. Bonus status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus winning combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is displayed on an active line, it is possible to shift to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is also possible to configure a plurality of bonus states. When a bonus combination is won, a state (carryover state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role." Further, such a carryover state is sometimes referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)."

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode of the small winning combination (including the probability of winning, its contents, and the mode of stop control, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) compared to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Since it is also a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can also be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include the first class special bonus (RB), the bonus continuous activation device (BB) related to the first class special bonus, and the second type special bonus (CB) (but not a carryover role) , an accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory, and a regular accessory (SB) (however, it is not a carryover winning combination). Further, for example, the bonus status corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of wins (for example, the upper limit is 8) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12) are played. configured. The BB state is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals is paid out (for example, the upper limit is 285).

The CB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals is paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153) or when a player wins an RB or SB during the MB state. Ru. The SB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played.

Note that the operating condition for the bonus state is not limited to only that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. For example, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory is in operation, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory starts operating, It is also possible to configure the first type special bonus (RB) to be automatically activated at the start of a game when the item is not in operation, or when the first type special bonus is finished being activated. That is, it is also possible to control the RB so that it is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB in BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC" or the like, and a specification in which the RB in BB operation is automatically activated in this way is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, while the BB is in operation, control can be performed such that the RB is in operation when a combination of symbols related to the prescribed RB is displayed on the active line. A specification in which the RB operates based on the display of corresponding symbol combinations in this manner is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory and the second type special accessory (CB) is also the same. In other words, without specifying the combination of symbols related to CB, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is in operation, or it is possible to control the combination of symbols related to the specified CB while the MB is in operation. It is also possible to perform control such that the CB is activated when the combination is displayed on the valid line.

[4-5-2. RT status]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of transitioning to the RT state (activating the RT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such an RT state is not provided. Further, it is also possible to configure a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination compared to a state where the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the non-RT state. Further, when providing a plurality of RT states, the same applies to the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode (especially the probability of winning) of the replay winning combination is relatively advantageous to the player is called a "high RT state" or "high probability replaying state", and the lottery of the replay winning combination is An RT state in which the aspect (particularly the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as a "low RT state", "low probability replay state", or the like.

For example, the RT state can be transitioned by satisfying any of the following transition conditions. Further, when providing a plurality of RT states, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, (5) (3) or (4) When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the winning is not in BB or MB (not carried over) and the player is not in RB, BB or MB state. When a predetermined number of games are played after the transition conditions are met.

[4-5-3. AT status]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of transitioning to the AT state (activating the AT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such an AT state is not provided. Further, it is also possible to configure a plurality of AT states. For example, the AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), because when the player wins the above-mentioned push order combination, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. This is a gaming state configured as a state.

In addition, if multiple AT states are provided, the gaming period of each AT state (including the ease of extension if the said period can be extended (also referred to as "add-on"; the same shall apply hereinafter)), The degree of advantage for the player can be varied by making the types of winning combinations for which stop operation information is reported or the probability of occurrence of stop operation information being reported different. Furthermore, the conditions for transition and termination of the AT state can be set as appropriate depending on the gameplay (excluding termination by execution of limit processing, which will be described later). Further, the AT state may be treated in the same way as the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

In addition, the playing period in the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of games) as long as the period is managed appropriately (game number management), and the predetermined number of games is one set, and the number of sets is (number of sets management). Alternatively, the control may be performed based on the number of payouts or the net increase (difference number) during the AT state (payout number management, difference number management). In addition, it may be managed based on the number of times (navi frequency) that notifications that affect the payout of medals (for example, push order navigation when winning a push order small winning combination) are performed in the AT state (navi number management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Further, the gaming period given when transitioning to the AT state and the gaming period given when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Furthermore, when providing a plurality of AT states, they may be managed using the same management method or may be managed using different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when predetermined transition conditions are met, it is possible to transition to the ART state (activate the ART state), which is a combination of the above-described high RT state and AT state. In other words, the ART state means an AT state performed in a high RT state, so at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and a transition to a high RT state (or a transition to a low RT state) is performed. The basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being informed of information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player). (or if transition to a low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). Note that when the transition conditions for the ART state are met, the transition to the AT state may be made first, and then the transition to the high RT state may be performed to transition to the ART state, or the high RT state and the AT state may be simultaneously transitioned ( Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the ART state by shifting to the ART state (substantially simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other gaming status]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 can also provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode in the advantageous section (see FIGS. 5 and 6), which will be described later, is also a state in which the player plays a game, and the advantage is whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be considered as gaming states. Further, from a similar viewpoint, for example, a gaming state can be provided in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to a bonus state can be varied. For example, when a bonus winning combination is won (carried over), a gaming state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is likely to be displayed due to stop control, and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination are relatively By providing a gaming state that is less likely to be displayed, the player's degree of advantage can be varied. Furthermore, for example, a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) is provided. It is also possible to configure the system so that the degree of advantage for the player can be varied.

In addition, the following methods can be used to change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether to extend the playing period of the AT state; the same applies hereinafter). You can also. For example, a "specific combination" may be determined as the internal winning combination. The number of medals awarded for the specific combination changes depending on the player's stop operation mode (may be the stop operation timing, the order of the presses, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 coins will be paid out; if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect answer), 1 coin or no coins will be paid out).

Then, if you win the specific combination in a specific gaming state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to change the advantageous degree of whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game to an advantageous one. No decision is made (which may include a decision as to whether or not to move directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the playing period in the AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific winning combination is won in the above-mentioned specific gaming state, and 8 coins are paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins have not been paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays a game using a specific gaming method, there are cases where an advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and cases where the advantageous decision is not made (there is a restriction on the occurrence of an advantageous decision). It can also be configured so that there are cases where the Please note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, there is a risk that the (next) player will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not continue from the next game onwards. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as states in which the game is performed with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. An example of the game section will be explained below. Note that the gaming section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Unfavorable section)
The non-advantageous period is configured as a gaming period in which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the requirements below are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or made stricter, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is not possible to inform the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state is not possible.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change) or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is satisfied, a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described below is executed in an advantageous section (in other words, a predetermined value that is updated as the game progresses during the advantageous section (for example, the number of advantageous section games counter and the number of advantageous section payout counters described below) value) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 coins), a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state. Note that by referring to the predetermined value, if the predetermined value is a specific updated value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set based on that. In addition, if a predetermined end condition is met during an advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, if a lottery is configured to end the advantageous section and the winner wins), then A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether to move to the advantageous section, etc.) can only be performed with reference to the determined internal winning combination, and the derived It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (symbol combination) or the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before transition). In addition, to determine which internal winning combination has been determined, it is possible to refer to data directly indicating the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or to check the sub-flag (multiple winning combinations) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to data that indirectly indicates an internal winning combination, such as one data to be determined.
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, it is not possible to set the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section as the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section after the setting change to be the non-advantageous section B, and so on.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the requirements below are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or made stricter, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the setting value is changed (setting change) or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is satisfied, an advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described below is executed in an advantageous section, it is necessary to terminate the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section (for example, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section or whether to extend a specific gaming state (mode), etc.) , it is possible to perform not only processing that refers to the determined internal winning combination, but also processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in an advantageous section. . In addition, other examples of various parameters that can be referenced include, for example, benefit information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, types of bonus states, types of RT states, and timing of stop operation of any reel. , or the order in which they are pressed.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a normal state which is disadvantageous for the player, a CZ state where it is easy to shift to the AT state, or an AT state where the expected value of medal increase is positive when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification. Further, for example, in response to a decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state, a CZ precursor may be set as a standby state until the actual transition to the CZ state, and a precursor effect suggesting transition to the CZ state may be performed. In response to a decision to transition to the AT state, or in the normal state or the CZ state, the system may be set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state, and a precursor effect suggesting transition to the AT state may be performed. States such as the AT precursor state can also be set according to the gameplay.
(6) It is possible to notify that you are in an advantageous section by lighting the section lamp (status display section) that can notify you whether you are in an unfavorable section or an advantageous section (if the section lamp is off) (It is possible to notify that the vehicle is in a non-advantageous section.) Note that, as described above, the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to a certain arbitrary timing. Basically, the lights may start turning on when the transition is from an unfavorable section to an advantageous section, and may continue to be turned on until the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. However, if the advantageous section to which the switch has been transferred is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, but the lighting may be started when the AT state is first entered. Note that if the transitional advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling aspect from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, an upper limit (restriction) is set on the period during which the advantageous section continues continuously. is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Furthermore, in the present embodiment, ending the advantageous section using such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or operation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Number of games limiter)
The number of games limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of games (number of games played) in an advantageous period reaches "1500". For example, an advantageous period game counter, which will be described later, starts counting when the advantageous period starts, and increases the count by 1 each time one game is completed. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section game counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous section is forcibly played (for example, even if the playing period in the AT state remains). It is terminated and moved to a non-advantageous section. Note that the number of games for which the game number limiter operates can be set to any number of games as long as the number of games is less than or equal to the upper limit of "1500". Furthermore, if the requirements for such a game number limiter are to be relaxed or made stricter, they can be changed accordingly. Alternatively, the gambling nature may be suppressed in stages according to the number of games during the advantageous period.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of medals paid out during an advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter described below starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time a medal is paid out, the corresponding number of medals is paid out (more specifically, the net increase is calculated by subtracting the number of bets from the number of medals paid out). (several minutes) Add the count. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "2400" or more), the advantageous section is forcibly given (for example, even if the playing period in the AT state remains). It is terminated and moved to a non-advantageous section. Note that the number of payouts at which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any number of payouts that is less than or equal to the upper limit of "2400". Further, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are to be relaxed or made stricter, they can be changed accordingly. Further, the gambling nature may be suppressed in stages according to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section.

In addition, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described below takes the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point), and counts the positive amount from the latest lowest point. (In other words, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). In other words, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from when the number of medals increases during the advantageous period (for example, when the AT state starts). It can also be configured as a limiter. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the number of bets is not subtracted from the payout number) instead of the above-mentioned net increase number.

Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter, may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of payouts limiter, and may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter and the number of payouts. The advantageous section limit processing may be executed using both number limiters. Note that when both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating condition for either limiter is satisfied after the start of the advantageous section.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of navigation times for the small winning combination in the push order during the AT state (that is, the number of times information on a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified regarding the winning combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). A navigation number limiter may be provided that executes the limit process when the number of times the navigation is reached. That is, as long as the gambling nature can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute the limit process using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display device will also be able to do this. You can perform effects during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the start of the MB state. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the completion of the MB state, and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the completion of the MB state, not only the above-mentioned bonus state effect will be performed on the external data display device, but also the bonus state will be displayed. You can count the number of times by type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and turned off based on the end of the AT state, the external data display device can also In conjunction with this, it is possible to perform effects during the AT state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of a predetermined AT state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is turned on. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the start of a specific AT state, and turned off based on the end of a specific AT state, the external data display will also be able to display the information during the above AT state. In addition to performing performances, it is also possible to count the number of ATs by type.

Also, for example, the AT state is configured as an AT state for managing the number of sets, and the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the first set of AT state, and from the second set onwards, the set is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on each time the AT state is hit, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted on an external data display. Note that the timing of turning on and turning off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation can be appropriately recognized by an external data display, hall computer, etc., the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again, such as a predetermined time, one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to transmit a plurality of types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is required that communication be performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (commands) for reporting changes in the status of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub-control circuit 200. An example of such a command will be explained below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify setting values, gaming conditions, and the like. Further, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Further, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command is configured to include parameters that specify internal winning combinations, gaming conditions, and the like. Further, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command is configured to include parameters that specify the contents of the lock performance. Further, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter specifying that rotation of the reels has started.

Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command includes parameters that specify the reel to be stopped, the position at which the reel is to be stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning activation flag) is determined, a winning activation command is transmitted. The winning activation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of display combination, the content of the bonus to be awarded, and the like. Further, for example, when starting an advantageous section, an advantageous section start command is transmitted. The advantageous section start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous section, the mode (gaming state), and the like. Further, for example, when ending an advantageous section, an advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command is configured to include parameters for specifying the termination of the advantageous section, the cause of the termination, and the like. Further, for example, when a payment operation is performed, a payment command is transmitted. The payment command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns and the like. Note that these are just examples, and commands other than these can be transmitted as needed, and unnecessary commands among these can also be prevented from being transmitted.

[4-10. Performance]
As mentioned above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various performances are performed using various production devices in order to increase the interest of the game, to provide useful information to the player, or to achieve the intended gameplay. It is now possible. An example of such a performance will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side performance]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side), the following effects can be performed, for example. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify information on a stop operation using the instruction monitor, but this is also included in performance in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period). Such a performance is called a "rock performance (or simply "rock")" or a "freeze performance (or simply "freeze")." Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a rock effect is not performed, or to allow a plurality of types of rock effects to be performed.

Further, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, if the start operation is disabled for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period after all stop operations have been performed. Further, for example, if the stop operation is disabled for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period after the start operation is performed. In addition, when providing multiple types of lock effects, the period during which the progress of the game is stopped (period for invalidating the player's game operations), the type of game operations to be invalidated, etc. are set for each lock effect. All you have to do is make it so.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, the performance display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only a variable display mode but also a combination with a stop display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. (including). Such a presentation is called a "reel presentation" and also a "symbol presentation." It should be noted that it may be configured so that such reel effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (performing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a reel effect is performed and cases where a reel effect is not performed.

In short, reel production is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R without the player's gaming operation during a period when the player's gaming operation is invalidated. It is a performance that will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to set a movement pattern for performing such a performance movement without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. Furthermore, by setting a plurality of movement patterns, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of reel effects. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects and multiple types of lock effects, a wider variety of effect patterns can be set. Note that only one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for reel production.

(pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that causes a pseudo game to be played during the above-described lock effect can be performed. Such performances are called "pseudo games." It should be noted that the system can be configured so that such pseudo games are not performed, or it can be configured so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (executing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where a pseudo game is not performed.

In short, a pseudo game is a process in which a player's game operation is accepted in a pseudo manner during a period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, and thereby the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated or stopped (temporarily stopped). The performance is performed by doing things like this. That is, the reel performance described above is performed by further intervening the player's game operation. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement button 9 are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operations. For this reason, it is essentially undesirable to use it for any other purpose. However, in a simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he or she is playing an actual game.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be explained using an example. For example, the pseudo game is performed in the following manner.
(1) Actual start operation by the player (here the execution conditions are met and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) Receive a pseudo-stop operation, which causes each reel to temporarily stop (during pseudo-gaming)
(4) After random delay processing, each reel actually starts rotating (the pseudo game ends and the actual game starts)

Note that random delay processing is, for example, when specific symbols are displayed side by side in the situation (3) above, and when each reel starts rotating normally in the situation (4) above, the player In some cases, it becomes easier to stop using a specific symbol as a landmark (helping with so-called "eye pushing"), so in order to correct this, a delay period is randomly assigned to each reel. This is a process for starting rotation after generation (such a delay period is also referred to as a "relocation period"). In addition, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the situations (3) and (4) above, the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor must be set to the specified value so that it is not mistakenly recognized as completely stopped. It is desirable that the reels alternate between forward and reverse directions for less than a period of time (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, if any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation (3) above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all reels are temporarily stopped), In the above-mentioned situation (4), each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay process is started. In addition, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging will not occur when the first reel temporarily stops or when the second reel temporarily stops. You may also do so.

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo game lamp is installed to notify that a pseudo game is in progress, and after a pseudo game is started in the situation (1) above, ), the pseudo game lamp may be turned on until the random delay process is started. Note that it is desirable that the pseudo game lamp be installed at a position above the operation section that accepts game operations from the player and at a position where it can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for any other purpose, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo game lamp is covered with a monochrome edge. Further, it is desirable that the display range of the pseudo game lamp including the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm). In addition, the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp includes a description that allows the user to recognize that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp for notifying that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY", "simulating game production in progress", or " It is preferable that the reel should have a description such as ``Reel automatic production in progress'', and it is desirable that such a written part should occupy 1/3 or more of the surface area. It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200 that controls the pseudo game lamp.

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-gaming display to notify that a pseudo-gaming is in progress may be displayed after the pseudo-gaming is started in the situation (1) above. ) The main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) may be used until the random delay process is started in the situation described in (). It is preferable that the pseudo-gaming display be displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's gaming operations and at a position where it can be seen during the game (in this embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 are located above the operating section, so either one may be used). In addition, the pseudo-gaming display, including the explanation part, must have a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and if the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area must exceed 642 square mm. , if the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area should preferably be 8.2% or more of the entire screen). In addition, the explanatory part of the pseudo-gaming display includes descriptions that make it clear that the pseudo-gaming display is a display to notify that a pseudo-gaming is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY", "simulating game production in progress", etc.). It is also desirable that the size of the reel is such that it can be read by the player without being obscured.

Also, for example, during a pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the situation (1) above to the start of the random delay process in the situation (4) above), the instruction monitor It is desirable to configure the system so that the information on the stop operation is not notified (if it is necessary to display the information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay process is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he is playing an actual game during a simulated game. Furthermore, if any of the above-mentioned measures is taken, even if the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220) is configured to notify information about the stop operation during the pseudo game. good. Similarly, during the simulated game, the sub performance device may perform a performance according to the game result of the simulated game (in conjunction with the simulated game operation).

In addition, in the actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during the pseudo game In this case, the test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is not output. Therefore, during the pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be outputted so that the test machine can recognize that the pseudo game is being played. Note that when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, it outputs a signal for pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the main control board 71 side performs the pseudo game signal. The game may be progressed (that is, the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). Further, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine is provided with such a pseudo game progression function, a changeover switch that can turn the function on and off may be provided. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the production content of the pseudo game in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be performed, for example, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side). Note that, as described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 allows the main display device 210 and the like to notify information about a stop operation, but this is also included in performance in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed that is completed in the current game (that is, completed in one game). Such a performance is called a "normal performance" or a "single performance". It should be noted that it may be configured so that such normal effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that continues over a plurality of games (that is, continues for a plurality of games) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "continuous reading performance" or a "continuous performance". Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a continuous performance is not performed, or to perform a plurality of types of continuous performance.

(Operation linked production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a performance can be performed in which the content of the performance can be changed according to a performance operation by a player. Such a performance is called an "operation-linked performance" and is also called a "button performance" or the like. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that such operation-linked effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Further, the operation-linked performance can be configured as a normal performance or as a continuous performance. Furthermore, the performance operations can include not only operations on the performance button group, but also various game operations.

Note that the various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or inform setting values, internal winning combinations, game status, game sections, bonus award details, period until the award is awarded, and the like. Further, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Furthermore, these uses are just examples.

(Other performances)
The pachi-slot machine 1 can also perform performances other than the various performances described above. For example, various types of notifications to players or game parlors (for example, notifications to prevent addiction, notifications to prevent forgotten items, error status notifications, demo status notifications, etc.) that are used for purposes other than those mentioned above are also included in production in a broad sense. . Note that the addictive prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. In addition, the forgotten item prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends or when a payment operation is performed, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. Further, the error state notification may be such that a warning or the like indicating the error is notified from the time the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification may be such that when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which no games have been played or when a payment operation has been performed, it is possible to notify that the machine is empty.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of specifications regarding the gaming performance of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine." It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and Some or all of the various specifications and functions described as another gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to the first gaming machine in this embodiment. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be a combination of these as appropriate.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the above-mentioned "center line." Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as gaming states. In addition, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flag where "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-bet bet state, hereinafter referred to simply as "2BB") described later is carried over, and the Between the 3BB flags where "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in a 3-card bet state.Hereafter, it may be simply explained as "3BB") is carried over, and when no bonus role has been won (carryover). (not flagged) and non-flags. Further, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that transitions in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state that transitions to in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB. Ru.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2-bet state) and with three medals bet (3-bet state). There is. Note that "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to play a game, and that the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b. This includes both the placing of two or three medals from the credits, and the automatic placing of two or three medals as a result of winning a replay combination.

[5-1. Game performance of first gaming machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. In addition, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays the game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section further includes a performance section (advantageous section/normal game) and an advantageous section. An increased section (advantageous section/pseudo bonus) will be provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not reported, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. The production section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, but as will be described later. , differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transition occurs.

In other words, the non-advantageous section is set as an initial state that is controlled when a game in the advantageous section ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the factory shipment is made. The production section is a control state as a normal state in which the expectation level of increasing section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition etc., and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increase period is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the number of medals. Note that both the effect section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by mutually transitioning these sections, they are configured as a series of advantageous sections.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section sub-flag is set as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later). is determined. Note that the sub-flag indicates an internal winning combination that plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various types of lottery related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous sections) performed by the main control circuit 100. This is information that allows groups to be identified by grouping and assigning the same information. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, so the amount of data can be compressed and the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery is performed using the non-advantageous section sub-flag.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Repbell" has internal winning combinations of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell123A1" to "F_Bell321B2". ” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Weak Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "confirmed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_confirmed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Naka Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that, in the non-advantageous section as well, the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag may be determined in the same way as in the advantageous section. Furthermore, these correspondence relationships are not limited to those described above.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is used as secondary information (sub-flag) according to an internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in an advantageous section. is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning time sub-flags and advantageous section winning time sub-flags.

The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is one of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Weak Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "confirmed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Confirmed Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach" (No. "8"). . The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Naka Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag ``Rip 1'' at the time of advantageous section winning is set to ``Right This is determined when the combination of symbols of ``Up Rip'' is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is ``Rip Up Right''). The sub-flag "Tori Rip 2" when winning an advantageous section is "Parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). This is determined when the symbol combination of "Rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Parallel Rip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of "Rip to the right" symbols is not possible between the 3BB flags. A combination of "parallel rep" symbols is displayed between 2BB flags and between non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Toru Reply 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section between 3BB flags, and between 2BB flags and between non-flags. When winning a prize in a section, "Toru Rep 2" is determined as the sub-flag. In the first gaming machine, when the advantageous section winning time sub-flags are different in this way, various lotteries described later (for example, pseudo-bonus transfer lottery using the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8(f) is varied.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is played as a winning combination in which the sub-flag changes depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. ) is described as an example, but the manner in which the sub-flag changes when winning an advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control will be different depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. Therefore, when winning such a role, the number of medals paid out does not change (or may be changed), and the combinations of symbols displayed are different. A sub-flag may be determined. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

For example, as described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag (non-flag) it is between, the pressed position (stop operation timing) ) is appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon" symbols will be displayed, and if the pressed position is not appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon Spills" will be displayed as the result will be missed. When winning a prize, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether the prize can be won without any loss or loss. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, the stop operation is predefined) between the 3BB flags. If it is performed in any of the following manners: the pressing order (the correct pressing order), the appropriate pressing position (timing of the stop operation), or a combination of these, the The symbol combination of "Parallel Rip" will be displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific manner, the symbol combination of "Rip to the right" will be displayed, and this will determine the sub-flag when winning a different advantageous section. You can do it like this. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the gaming state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these regarding the specific combination, All modes that allow different secondary information to be determined according to different stop display modes and thereby allow the degree of advantage to vary can be applied.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery to move to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing, a destination mode, etc. is determined according to the non-advantageous section sub-flag. In addition, when making this determination, there are cases in which only the type of mode when moving to an advantageous section is determined (in Figure 5, "beginning of advantageous section"), and cases in which not only the type of mode but also a shift to a pseudo bonus is determined. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which it is not determined to shift to a pseudo bonus in a non-advantageous period.

Here, each mode in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 6. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may also be referred to as a gaming state or a control state) for varying the expectation level of transition (granting) to an increased section (pseudo bonus) in a performance section (normal game). Yes, in the performance section (normal game), it is determined whether or not to transfer to a pseudo bonus according to this mode, it is decided to maintain an advantageous section, or it is decided to end an advantageous section and move to a non-advantageous section. It is supposed to be done.

Start mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that is easy to stay in when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the expectation level of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the expectation level of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later). Although not shown, in the start mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games." The ceiling number of games is used to force the transition to the pseudo bonus when the period of not transitioning to the pseudo bonus reaches a certain period. Therefore, the fewer the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous it is to the player, and the greater the number of ceiling games, the disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, A mode is the easiest mode for players to stay in when playing games, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, and the expectation level of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c in Figure 7 below)). ), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later). Note that in the normal A mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games." In addition, in FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after the pseudo bonus" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the mode shifts to end A mode or end B mode, which will be described later, and in that mode, 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus. If a game is played and the normal A mode is selected when transitioning from the non-advantageous period to the advantageous period after the game has been played and the period has shifted to the non-advantageous period, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + End A The game period in mode or end B mode is "32 games" + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, so this is expressed. The same applies to the normal B mode, heaven preparation mode, and chance mode.

Normal B mode is relatively easy for players to stay in while playing games, and although it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the expectation level for shifting to pseudo bonuses is This is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the degree of expectation for shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). Note that in the normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In the Heaven Preparation Mode, the expectation level of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), but the ceiling number of games is set to "466 games", and when transitioning to a pseudo bonus After that, it is certain that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later), so in that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode.

Chance mode has a relatively high expectation of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is set to 222 games, so it is relatively advantageous in that sense. mode. However, the level of expectation for transition to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode that is easy to stay in if you transition to a pseudo-bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after it ends, and there is no expectation of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. The degree of expectation for shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later). In the termination A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section.

End B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than end A mode, because it is easy to stay if you move to a pseudo bonus and do not move to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after it ends. mode, the expectation level to shift to a pseudo bonus mode is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) described below), and the expectation level to shift to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see Figure 7 (discussed below)). (See 8(f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. Note that the end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode."

The guarantee mode is the mode to stay in when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation level for transitioning to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is "32 games". In that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the level of expectation for transition to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later). That is, when Heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode that maintains (guarantees) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decline in interest due to it.

Heaven A mode may include the extension (addition) of pseudo bonuses in a row (if the AT state continues due to a decision to extend (addition) made during the AT state). The same applies hereafter), the expectation level for transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling It is a relatively advantageous mode with a moderate probability that the mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, the ceiling mode loop rate may be set differently. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so that , or the lottery value can be simply set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate is. The same applies to heaven B mode and heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which you can expect pseudo bonuses to be played consecutively, and the expectation of transitioning to pseudo bonuses is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is 32 games. ”, and is a relatively advantageous mode with a high probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). In other words, this mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which you can expect pseudo-bonuses to be played consecutively, and the expectation level for transitioning to pseudo-bonuses is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is 32 games. '', and the probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode. Note that heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode."

Note that each of the above-mentioned modes is just an example, and the configuration of the mode is not limited to this. Modes other than the above-mentioned modes may be set, or some of the above-mentioned modes may not be set.

Furthermore, although the non-advantageous section has been described as being relatively less advantageous than the advantageous section, the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increased section is higher than when at least one mode is set in the advantageous section, or the average number of games required to shift to the increased section is shorter. It is also possible to make a specification such as ``increasing the rate of increase'', or a specification in which the non-advantageous section is most likely to be an increasing section. By doing this, an incentive is created to play games even in a state where it is determined that the area is not advantageous, such as after a setting change, and therefore, there is an incentive to start playing games even when the store opens. In addition, even if the section lamp stops lighting after 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not determined that the most disadvantageous situation will occur, so even in such a case, there is no incentive to continue playing. becomes. In addition, up to this point, we have explained that the production section is a gaming state in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, but compared to the increase section, there are disadvantageous aspects (for example, reducing the frequency of notifications, (such as changing the winning combination), the game state may be such that information on a stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. In the performance section (normal game), first, for each game, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the advantageous section winning sub-flag. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not to transfer to a pseudo bonus, "winning (current game)" means to transfer from the current game to a pseudo bonus, and " "Winning (next game)" means transitioning to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, if a "win (current game)" is determined, the game will be played at the start of the current game, and if a "win (next game)" is determined, the game will be played at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is disabled for a certain period of time, and during the invalid period, a reel performance ("Red 7 set" performance) in which "Red 7" symbols are displayed in a row on the main display window 4 is performed. , in a game where a pseudo bonus has started and a "red 7" effect is performed, if it is necessary to notify information on a stop operation, at least the invalid period has ended and the game operation (stop operation) is valid. The information on the stop operation is notified when (it may be before, but not before the above-described random delay process is started).

In the production section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus and the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and mode transfer lottery described below. (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) are not performed.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay" In a game in which a player wins in "B"), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In addition, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), "Toripu 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag than when "Toripu 1" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. The percentage of cases where it is decided to shift to pseudo bonuses is higher. However, the manner in which "Toru Reply 2" is given preferential treatment than "Toru Reply 1" is not limited to this. For example, in the case where "Toripu 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may be decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability; In such a case, it may not be possible to decide to shift to a pseudo bonus.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Further, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), it is determined to transfer to the pseudo bonus, and if the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transfer lottery (at the time of ceiling) described below will not be performed.

In addition, in the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f), "Toripu 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag rather than "Toripu 1" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. In this case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a mode relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the manner in which "Toru Reply 2" is given preferential treatment than "Toru Reply 1" is not limited to this. For example, in the case where ``Pass 2'' is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag, it may be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but the advantageous section winning sub-flag may be `` In the case where it is determined that the game mode is 1, it may not be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (either an addition method or a subtraction method), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the ceiling number of games associated with the current mode (or determined in advance at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that a "win (current game)" is determined, or it is also possible to make sure that a "win (next game)" is determined. Further, any of these may be determined by lottery.

In the performance section (normal game), when the number of games reaches the ceiling and it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

In addition, the processes related to the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest are the same processing contents, so they use the same lottery table and control flow. It can be controlled using In addition, the processes related to mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) are the same except for the type of sub-flag, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. can be controlled.

In addition, if "Win (this game)" is not set as the type of winning of the pseudo bonus, at the timing when the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined, the advantageous section winning sub-flag has also been determined, and Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo bonus transfer processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed all at once. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be performed all at once in one process.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. As mentioned above, when it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus in the performance section (normal game) and the pseudo bonus is started ("pseudo bonus start" in Figure 5), the transition to the increase section (pseudo bonus) occurs. . In addition, as mentioned above, in the performance section (normal game), if the end A mode or end B mode is controlled and 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus (in Figure 5, the "Advantage section ends" (via Ends A and B)"), then shift to a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if the conditions for limit processing shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are satisfied, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated ("end of advantageous section (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, Shift to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling reduction lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus, depending on the current mode. In (e) of Figure 8, "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. , means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (reduced). Note that the ceiling reduction lottery may be performed not only when the pseudo bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo bonus.

As a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, if it is decided not to reduce the number of ceiling games, and when the pseudo bonus ends, if you do not have 1G continuous stock described below, the number of ceiling games will be reduced according to the current mode. is set (in the case of end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but the ceiling number of games may be temporarily set here) , the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus ends" in FIG. 5), and the game moves to the performance section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is determined to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, when the pseudo bonus ends, "0 games" is set as the ceiling number of games. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of games reaches the ceiling, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increased section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "determined hand" or "medium Che" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section). . Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that the destination mode may also be determined when an advantageous section winning sub-flag other than the above is determined, but in this case, as a general rule, a mode that is relatively disadvantageous than the current mode is selected. In order to avoid being determined as the previous mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referred to.

In the increased section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. In this case, as above, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively disadvantageous than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is based on the lottery value. Another mode transition lottery table with a different value may be referred to.

In the increasing section (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate a 1G consecutive lottery according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag or the advantageous section winning sub-flag. be done. In addition, in (d) of Figure 7, "non-winning" means that 1G series will not be generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" means that the right to generate 1G series (1G series stock) is 1 piece. It means that it is given (the 1G continuous stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that a plurality of 1G continuous stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be awarded during one pseudo bonus. Furthermore, the 1G continuous lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G continuous stocks can be awarded in one 1G continuous lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G continuous stock), one 1G continuous stock is used up (the 1G continuous stock counter is (subtracted by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. Note that in this case, since a pseudo bonus corresponding to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is not 1 or more (that is, if you do not own 1G continuous stock), and if you have not won the ceiling reduction lottery described above, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the case of end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but the number of ceiling games is temporarily set here. ), the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus end" in FIG. 5), and the transition to the performance section (normal game) occurs.

In addition, if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G continuous stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will take priority, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G continuous stock will be given. Alternatively, the 1G continuous stock may be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store information that can carry forward the fact that there is ceiling shortening.

In the first gaming machine, as an example of the structure of the increase period (pseudo bonus), the structure continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 coins can be acquired, but the structure of the pseudo bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo bonus is configured as a "pseudo BB (Big Bonus)" and is also equipped with a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)" which is a pseudo bonus that lasts for "22 games" and can earn up to 110 coins. You can do it like this. In this case, when it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transfer lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G continuous lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo BB") RB or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, in 50% increments). Note that "pseudo RB" may have a different value from "pseudo BB" (more specifically, it has a lower value than "pseudo BB"), so for example, the number of consecutive games may be different from "pseudo BB". BB", but by setting the BellNavi rate (probability of notification of stop operation information) to a low value, it is possible to differentiate the maximum number of coins that can be acquired and make the values different. In addition, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel performance in which "BAR" symbols are displayed all together on the main display window 4, or a reel performance in which "Red 7-Red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. Just do it like this. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to one configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continued games (game period) can be changed.

Additionally, if the conditions for executing the limit process shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are met during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section will be forcibly ended (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section due to limit processing"). ), resulting in a transition to a non-favorable section.

In the first gaming machine, the above-described flow of the game is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-bet bet state. Therefore, when a game is played with two bets, for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. are not performed, and The number of ceiling games is also not updated. Furthermore, if a game is played with two bets during the pseudo bonus, the medals are configured not to increase in the two bet state, so the period during the pseudo bonus does not become an increasing period. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player is basically at a disadvantage when playing a game with two bets.

Here, when a game is played with two bets, the lottery regarding the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) is used. (various lotteries) and processing (for example, updating the number of ceiling games) will not be performed, but the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter for the number of games limiter and the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter for the payout number limiter will be updated. It is desirable that the These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing the gambling nature by limiting the number of games stayed in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of coins acquired, so even if two coins are bet, these counters will not be updated. If this is the case, there will be cases where the number of stay games and the number of coins won will exceed the upper limit of the set advantageous zone due to intervening games with two bets, and as a result, it may not be possible to appropriately suppress the gambling nature. It's to get it. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counter be configured to be able to be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the above-described flow of the game is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when a game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, if a bonus state occurs during a pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state with 3 bets). , the period during the pseudo bonus may not be an increase period. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be at a disadvantage if he plays the game in the bonus state.

Therefore, the first gaming machine is configured so that it is recommended to play a game with a 3-card bet between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, a 3-card bet between 2BB flags is referred to as a "recommended game"). In some cases, other states may be described as "non-recommended gaming states"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and cannot be won in a 3-piece bet state. The configuration is such that it does not. Further, 3BB is a bonus combination that can be won only in a 3-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags is configured such that it can only be won in a 3-piece bet state and not in a 2-piece bet state. Furthermore, there is no case where 3BB is won between 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB is won between 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, after winning 2BB in a 2-bet bet state between non-flags (without winning 2BB) and placing it between 2BB flags, a 3-bet bet state is made. If you play the game with , you can play the game in the above-mentioned recommended gaming state without worrying about whether or not you will win the bonus combination.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling reduction lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, 1 The probability of winning the ceiling reduction lottery is /8 (32/256), while the ceiling reduction lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is greater than that, This prevents the number of ceiling games from being shortened.

Note that even in a mode where the number of ceiling games is more than "32 games", the probability that the number of ceiling games is higher (for example, 1/64) than in a mode where the number of ceiling games is "32 games" is may be determined to be shortened.

Further, the manner in which the number of ceiling games is shortened is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if you shorten "32 games" to a smaller number of predetermined games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be achieved, so when you win the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of shortened games will be further determined. Alternatively, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance in the ceiling shortening lottery.

Moreover, the opportunity for performing the ceiling shortening lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, during a pseudo bonus, a ceiling reduction lottery may be performed for each game. In addition, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, ceiling shortening lottery will be performed for each game. You may also do so. In these cases, the advantageous section winning time sub-flag and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d), it is shown that 1G consecutive stock may be awarded regardless of which mode the current mode is. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling of 32 games or not.

Note that the manner in which the rights are granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode where the number of ceiling games is "32 games", 1G continuous lottery is not performed considering that a ceiling shortening lottery will be performed, and in a mode where the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games". By allowing the 1G consecutive lottery to be performed when , the gambling nature of the game may be prevented from becoming excessively high.

Moreover, the opportunity for performing the 1G lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed even in an advantageous section (performance section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be used up in the next pseudo bonus.

Although illustrations are omitted in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the current mode is the heaven mode at the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the game machine is in an advantageous state. A special bonus performance to suggest something is executed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special bonus performance is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the ceiling reduction lottery will be executed. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if a special bonus effect is executed at the start of a pseudo-bonus, it will be suggested that you are at least staying in heaven mode, and there is also the expectation that you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a 100% probability even when a 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning. Various possibilities such as winning only can be suggested, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus) will be controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the end of the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus), , in the case of heaven mode), the period may be further shortened. Therefore, even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, , 1G continuous stock) may restart the advantageous state, so it is possible to increase the player's expectations and improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when a "confirmed combination" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning in an advantageous section (i.e., "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_ ``Reach roll'' is determined as an internal winning combination), and if it is determined to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the mode transition lottery described above, the probability is 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). ), a special rock performance can be performed. Furthermore, even if the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player may also select the "Confirmed winning combination" as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. '' is determined, so if the sub-flag ``Medium Che'' is determined when winning an advantageous section, it is the same as when ``Confirmed hand'' is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section. Similarly, a special lock performance may be made possible.

Here, since the "confirmed hand" is a hand that also confirms the pseudo bonus transfer (see (c) in FIG. 7), when the special lock performance is executed, the player can transfer the pseudo bonus and transfer to heaven C mode. It is now possible to recognize that there has been a game, and it has become very interesting for players. The special lock performance is, for example, configured as a performance in which game operations (stop operations) are disabled for approximately 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this time, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in reverse, or a special video etc. that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display section 21. You may also do so. Also, special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce effects by combining these. In addition, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be made to continue until the player performs the next game operation (in other words, the effect can be executed to the end or canceled midway through). It is also possible to leave the decision of whether to proceed with the game to the player).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, for example, even if you stay in heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. , it may be undesirable to perform the above-mentioned special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, within a series of advantageous sections, if it is decided to execute a special lock effect for the first time, the special lock effect will be executed, but after that, within the same series of advantageous sections, the same conditions will be applied. To control so that a special lock performance is not executed even if it is established. In addition, the method is that once a special lock effect is executed, information indicating that effect is stored, and if the information is stored in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter, the special lock effect is not activated in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the performance may not be made, or the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the result of the decision indicates that the performance will be executed. may also be rewritten to indicate that it will not be executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

Note that the manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the upper limit number of times that the special lock effect can be executed may be set as "twice" or "three times" instead of "one time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be set as appropriate depending on the expected value of balls to be rolled out per special lock effect.

Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is performed upon winning a "confirmed role", and a decision is made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, for example, there are cases where the game enters heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than winning the "confirmed role" (see (f) in Figure 8), so the special lock effect is executed in these cases as well. A special lock effect will be executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as that triggered by winning a "determined role", or it may be a different probability). It may be determined that the

Furthermore, for example, upon winning a "determined role", it is first decided whether or not a special lock performance will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock performance will be executed, the heaven It may be possible to shift to C mode. In other words, the special lock performance may be executed in response to the decision to move to heaven C mode, or the transition to heaven C mode may be performed in response to the decision to perform the special lock performance. It may also be possible to shift to .

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous section may be adopted as the condition for determining whether or not the special lock performance is to be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or control game number counter described below is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or control payout number counter described later is less than "1201", , When it is determined whether or not to execute the special lock effect as described above, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described below becomes "750" or more, or When the value of the section payout number counter or the control payout number counter becomes "1201" or more, a decision as to whether or not a special lock performance will be executed is made not to be made in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do that.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16, which will be described later). In the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set multiple times, special effects (for example, special lock effects) are set each time. controlled so that it does not occur. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the winning of a specific combination (for example, a "determined combination") will trigger an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). , control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. In the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs multiple times, the control is performed so that a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine secondary information (for example, advantageous section winning sub-flag) according to the determined internal winning combination, and secondary information (for example, an advantageous section winning sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. For example, it is possible to determine whether to grant an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stop operation is notified, depending on the determined secondary information. It is assumed that it can be determined.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the provision of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined but also when a combination of symbols is displayed. It is possible to diversify the gameplay regarding giving.

In addition, the first gaming machine manages both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination as common secondary information. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and amount of information related to provision.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the betted gaming value is the first amount (for example, 3 coins), the first special prize (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special prize (for example, , 2BB) cannot be won. Further, when the betted game value is the second amount (for example, 2 coins), the second special winning combination is made possible to win, while the first special winning combination is not made possible to win. In addition, when winning a specific combination (for example, "F_Replay A"), if it is in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "Rip to the right") is displayed, and If it is in the 2 special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "Parallel Rip") (see FIG. 15, which will be described later).

In the first gaming machine, different secondary information can be determined when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed and when a specific symbol combination is displayed. In other words, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is in effect. It is possible to further diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of states.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific winning combination is won and a specific combination of symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are symbol combinations related to re-gaming, it is considered that re-gaming is activated no matter which one is displayed. The same benefits will be granted.

Note that the manner in which the same benefits are provided is not limited to the above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination that is associated with the granting of gaming value. If you win a specific small role, for example, if you are in the first special permission state, you will receive 1 coin (this value is arbitrary and may be any other value below the betted gaming value, or The second special permission In this case, a combination of specific symbols that gives the same number of gaming values as when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed (a combination of symbols that gives a gaming value equivalent to "parallel reply") is displayed. It's okay.

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are combinations of symbols that are "missing" (however, in order to make it possible to decide whether or not to give an advantageous state, a symbol that is different from the case of pure "missing") A combination of symbols may be configured as a combination of distinguishable symbols. Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on which special permission state is in place. , it is possible to diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of advantageous states. In addition, in games where a specific combination has been determined, the same benefits are granted regardless of which special permission state the player is in, so even if the gameplay is changed, the player is not directly disadvantaged. You can prevent it from getting covered.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, a specific combination of symbols can be displayed when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner in the second special permission state, and a specific combination of symbols can be displayed. It may be configured such that it is not possible to display a specific combination of symbols when a stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a specific combination of symbols is displayed. If a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state different depending on when a combination of specific symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, if you win a specific combination, if you are in the first special permission state, a predetermined combination of symbols will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if you are in the second special permission state, you will be able to display the stop operation in a specific manner. When the stop operation is performed, a specific combination of symbols may be displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, a predetermined symbol combination may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination is determined when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate on at least one reel (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "press position ○", "press position correct", etc.). When a specific combination of symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressed position x", "incorrect pressed position", etc.), the specified symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on (the timing of) the player's stop operation, which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and improves the interest of the game. can.

In addition, as mentioned above, the specific winning combination can also be configured as a specific small winning combination, and in this case, on at least one reel, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressed position is ○), the specific symbol will be displayed. A combination is displayed and a predetermined number of gaming values are awarded, and if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressed position is x), a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of gaming values are awarded. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same benefit). Further, a predetermined number may be awarded more gaming value than a specific number. Furthermore, the predetermined number may be awarded less gaming value than the specific number. Further, at least one of the specific symbol combination and the predetermined symbol combination may be used as a symbol combination when a failure occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible to not only change the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, but also to change the content of direct benefits, so that the player This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and improves the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, on one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the stop operation becomes an appropriate stop operation and a specific symbol combination is displayed, and when the timing of the stop operation is other than the first timing, the stop operation is appropriate. When the first specific combination is not and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and the timing of the stop operation is a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed. , and when the timing is other than the second timing, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without an appropriate stop operation. What is the second specific combination, and when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing? When the third timing is different, the stop operation is appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the stop operation is not appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. A third specific winning combination is provided, and these winnings may be won with the same probability of winning.

In addition, in this case, the specific combination of symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), and the specified combination of symbols is displayed when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect pressing order). It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on the player's stop operation (the procedure), which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and improves the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above, and in this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. It can be configured such that when a value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of an incorrect pressing order), a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same benefit). Further, a predetermined number may be awarded more gaming value than a specific number. Furthermore, the predetermined number may be awarded less gaming value than the specific number. Further, at least one of the specific symbol combination and the predetermined symbol combination may be used as the symbol combination when a missed spot occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state be changed due to the player's stop operation (the procedure), but also the details of the direct benefits can be changed, so the player This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and improves the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order will be limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when it is the first stop on the left, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop in the center or right, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. When it is the 1st specific combination and the middle 1st stop, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the left/right 1st stop, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed. When the combination is the 2nd specific combination that is not displayed and the 1st stop on the right, it becomes an appropriate stop operation and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when it is the 1st stop on the left or middle, it is not an appropriate stop operation. A combination of specific symbols is provided with a third specific combination that is not displayed, and these may be set to win with the same probability of winning.

Up to this point, in a unit game in which a specific winning combination has been won, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order), the process for determining the transition from an unfavorable section to an advantageous section, or an advantageous section. As described above, the determination process regarding the granting of advantageous states (including pseudo bonus transition lottery, mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantageousness of the gaming situation in advantageous sections) will be changed. Among these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may result in disadvantage) can be regarded as the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which an arbitrary effect (warning notification) can be generated to call attention.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, there is a higher possibility that an advantageous state will be given when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It has become. In other words, assuming that 3 coins are bet, the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) is a state in which the granting of an advantageous state is more preferential than the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). It is.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, if you win a predetermined combination (for example, "Push Order Bell B" described later), if you are in the first special permission state, you can combine the awarded symbols (for example, 8 pieces payout) regardless of the batting order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, if the batting order is the predefined correct pressing order, the given symbol combination will be displayed, but the batting order is predefined. If it is not the correct pressing order, the combination of awarded symbols will not be displayed and no gaming value will be awarded, or a smaller amount of gaming value will be awarded than if the combination of assigned symbols had been displayed. It is configured so that a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that results in one payout) is displayed. That is, unless the operation of the advantageous state is taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the granting of gaming value is given more preferential treatment than the second special permission state.

In other words, even if the player is in a non-recommended gaming state, if the player plays a game with a bet of 3 cards between the 3BB flags, the probability of giving an advantageous state will not be given preferential treatment, but the gaming value will be increased when the advantageous state is not activated. Since the granting probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be played with a relatively small difference in slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility that the player can rapidly increase the gaming value is reduced, can be defined, for example, as a "stable state."

On the other hand, if the player plays a game in the recommended gaming state, the probability of granting an advantageous state will be treated favorably, but the probability of granting gaming value when the favorable state is not activated will not be treated favorably, so the favorable condition will not be activated. The game can be played in a state where the difference in slope value between when it is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which there is a high possibility that the player will be able to rapidly increase the gaming value, but the player's gaming value is likely to decrease can be defined, for example, as a "rough sea state."

Here, the method of creating two states, a stable state and a rough sea state, is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the pseudo-bonus transition probability is made higher than in the "rough sea state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is made higher than in the "rough sea state". lower. In addition, in the "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is lower than in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is lower than in the "stable state". enhance In this way, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to hit a pseudo bonus for the first time in a "stable state" but difficult to hit consecutive games, and in a "rough sea state" it is difficult to hit a pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is easy to win consecutive games. This situation can be created. As for the stop control of the predetermined combination, as described above, it may be changed between 2BB flags and between 3BB flags, or it may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between 3BB flags).

[5-2. Design layout configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement of the first gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Red Blank", "Yellow Blank", " Ten types of symbols, ``White Blank 1'' and ``White Blank 2,'' are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Further, FIGS. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing examples of symbol combination tables of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine. That is, in the following, which symbol is selected depending on the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine and the stop operation mode (i.e., batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. We will explain whether the combinations (which can also be referred to as display combinations, winning combinations, stop display modes, display results, etc.) are displayed.

First, in the first gaming machine, in an internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a minor role. It shows.

“F_2BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 2-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while it can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 3-card bet. The structure is such that if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. In a game in which "F_2BB" wins in a 2-bet state, or in a game in which "F_2BB" is a "miss" between the 2BB flags, "BB01" will be displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB) will be displayed. (bonus state). On the other hand, even if it is between two BB flags, "BB01" will not be displayed in a three-bet bet state.

“F_3BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a bet of 3 coins in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), but when a game is played with a bet of 2 coins, The structure is such that if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3-bet state, or in a game in which "F_3BB" is a "miss" between the 3BB flags, "BB02" will be displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB) will be displayed. (bonus state). On the other hand, even if it is between 3 BB flags, there is no case where "BB02" is displayed in a 2-bet bet state.

In addition, in the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referred to and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of coins that can be started is only 3 coins). During the 2BB state and 3BB state, the RB, which is a first class special accessory, is always controlled to be in operation (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two winnings occur or two games are played after activation, the RB state is once terminated and activated again. Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the end condition for the 2BB state is stipulated that more than one medal is paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition for the 3BB state is defined as that more than 176 medals are paid out in the 3BB state. It is stipulated that the amount has been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, special mode transition processing is performed. For example, if the mode in which you entered the bonus state (same as when the bonus state ends, as no mode transition occurs during the bonus state), i.e., the current mode, is "start mode", then the transition destination The mode is "start mode". Furthermore, if the current mode is one of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the destination mode will be "normal A mode". Further, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the destination mode is "end A mode". Furthermore, if the current mode is one of "guarantee mode," "heaven A mode," "heaven B mode," and "heaven C mode," the destination mode will be "guarantee mode."

“F_Replay A” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, any one of "REP64" to "REP72" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode (these are "Replay" symbols in a straight line in the lower row or in a straight line in the middle row). Because they are displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel reps." Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower reps," and "REP72" is a "middle rep." ``reply'') is displayed and a replay is granted. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, "REP73" (this can be called "replay" as it displays the "replay" symbol upward to the right) will be displayed and a replay will be granted.

“F_Replay B” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel reply" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state and a replay will be granted.

“F_Cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-bet bet state, if the pressed position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" will be displayed (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol at the bottom of the left reel 3L). Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "Cherry Rip") is displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is granted.

“F_Confirmed Cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the pressed position is ○ for at least left reel 3L, one of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are The "cherry" symbol is displayed at the bottom of the left reel 3L, and since symbols such as "REP42" that can increase the player's expectations on other reels are also displayed, these are ) is displayed and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, the above-mentioned "Cherry Rep" and "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_middle cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the pressed position is ○ for at least left reel 3L, one of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row of the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle row cherry reps"), and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_Reach” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state, regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP01" to "REP14" will be pressed regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customary for players to It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitively notify (or suggest) a transition to an advantageous state, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye reps") is displayed, and replay is possible. Granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_Watermelon” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these are "watermelon" symbols displayed side by side, so (which can be collectively referred to as "Watermelon") is displayed, and if the bet is on 3 medals, three medals are paid out, and if the bet is on 2 medals, two medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (these can be collectively referred to as "watermelon spills" because the "watermelon" symbols are not displayed side by side) is displayed and one medal is paid out. In addition, in the case of the pressed position x, it is also possible to configure so that a missed medal occurs and no medals are paid out.

"F_Bell123A1", "F_Bell123A2", "F_Bell132A1", "F_Bell132A2", "F_Bell213A1", "F_Bell213A2", "F_Bell231A1", "F_Bell231A2", "F_Bell Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A."

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor combination with 6 choices (any one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct pressing order). If the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, the "lower right bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "middle bell" ("FRU04"), "right rising bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "lower bell" ("FRU07"). is displayed, and if the bet is 3 medals, 8 medals are paid out, and if the bet is 2 medals, 2 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations will have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressed position ○, and the pressed position ○ If so, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, the remaining stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ○, and if the pressed position is ○, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

"F_Bell123B1", "F_Bell123B2", "F_Bell132B1", "F_Bell132B2", "F_Bell213B1", "F_Bell213B2", "F_Bell231B1", "F_Bell231B2", "F_Bell ``Bell 312B1'', ``F_Bell 312B2'', ``F_Bell 321B1'', and ``F_Bell 321B2'' are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B."

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor combination between the 3BB flags in the 2-bet bet state and the 3-bet bet state. If it is decided as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the bet is 3 medals, 8 medals will be paid out, and if the bet is 2 medals, 2 medals will be paid out. A number of medals will be paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" is not pressed in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between non-flags in the 3-bet state, and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). If the winning combination is decided as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed and 8 medals will be displayed. paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations will have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressed position ○, and the pressed position ○ If so, which one of the winning "one-card combinations" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, the remaining stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ○, and if the pressed position is ○, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

The "F_RB combination of 8 cards" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight medals are paid out.

The "1 piece F_RB combination" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "1-card combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 1-card combination will be displayed. medals will be paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the correspondence between the internal winning combination, stop operation mode, display combination, etc. shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, in the first gaming machine, in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when the result is a pure "loss", when "BB01" is missed and becomes a "loss", "BB02" can be displayed. In a 3-bet state, when you miss "BB02" and become a "miss", when you become a "miss" due to a 3-bet state between 2BB flags, when a 2-bet state occurs between 3BB flags A "miss" may occur in various situations, such as when a "miss" occurs due to this, or when a "miss" occurs due to a "small winning combination" being missed. Therefore, in order to vary the symbol combinations that are displayed as "lost" in some or all of these cases, these different symbol combinations are defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the determined internal winning combination is By allowing these to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the situation, it is also possible to vary the symbol combinations related to "missing" displayed depending on the state or the like.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing ( Each limit process (number of games) and semi-limit process (number of payouts) are executed. Note that this is an example of limit processing that can be executed, and limit processing other than these limit processing can be executed, or some of these limit processing can be executed. You can also prevent it from happening.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when games during the advantageous section are played 1500 times in a row). The advantageous section game counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit process). It is cleared (initialized) after the counting ends. Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts both when the number of bets is two and three. Further, the advantageous section game number counter performs counting also in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended and the non-advantageous section is completed, regardless of whether it is during the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus). to be transferred to In addition, at this time, information regarding advantageous sections (for example, information for controlling the effect section and increase section, information regarding the current mode, information regarding the playing period of pseudo bonuses, information regarding the number of ceiling games and whether there is ceiling reduction) information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary to control the advantageous section) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") that has been paid out since the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the section ends (including the end due to activation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter performs counting whether the number of bets is two or three. Further, the advantageous section payout number counter performs counting also in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter will count as appropriate according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2 pieces" or "-3 pieces", etc.) when a "miss" or "missed" occurs during the advantageous section, for example. The value is subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the start of the advantageous section, it may become a negative value (or, if it becomes a negative value, it will always remain ``0''). ). That is, the advantageous section payout number counter is capable of counting the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section from the lowest point to the defined maximum point (difference in number of medals: 2400).

When the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended, regardless of whether it is during the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section to be transferred to Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when games in the advantageous section are played 1445 times in a row). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit process). It is cleared (initialized) after the counting ends. Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, and does not count when the number of bets is two. Further, the control game number counter performs counting when the game is in the non-bonus state, and does not perform counting when the game is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be activated without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not in progress (that is, if it is in the performance section), first, the process is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is not won, the transfer to the pseudo bonus is made by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly, and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section game number counter in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", whereas the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of games (continuable period) during the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (Fig. 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when a predetermined regulation period has been played in an advantageous area in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (number of games) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player will feel a sense of distrust or loss, which will reduce the interest in the game. There are cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (number of games) is performed on a game that is the continuable period (55 games) per increase period before the game on which normal limit processing (number of games) is performed. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus being terminated midway.

Note that from this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above-mentioned timing. For example, the special limit process (number of games) is executed before the game where the normal limit process (number of games) is executed by the continuation period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per 2 increase periods. It is also possible to do so. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the limit processing (number of games) is normally executed before the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase period. A special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game. Also, for example, in the case of specifications such as going through a precursor state before moving to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuable period (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) per increase period before the game that is played. In other words, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed; It is assumed that settings can be made as appropriate depending on the game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). In addition, the control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and When the section ends (including the end due to activation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter performs counting when the number of bets is three, and does not perform the counting when the number of bets is two. Further, the control payout number counter performs counting when in a non-bonus state, and does not perform counting when in a 2BB state and a 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs in the advantageous section, the control payout number counter is decremented by an appropriate value according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-3 coins", etc.). However, the control payout number counter does not cause a "missing medal" (or a difference) when a "missing medal" occurs during an advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out). The number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game where you bet 3 medals and win "Push Order Bell A", if the batting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference number is " On the other hand, if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be ``1'' (the difference in number of medals is ``-2''), and if the pressing position is not appropriate. If a medal is missed, the number of medals paid out becomes "0" (the difference number is "-3"), but the control payout number counter shows the difference number "-3" in any case in the game. +5 pieces” are counted.

In addition, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter becomes It is corrected to the value of the section payout number counter. Note that the control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout number counter.

When the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, if it is in the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be released without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not in progress (that is, if it is in the performance section), first, the process is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the transfer to the pseudo-bonus is made by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly, and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter where normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates) is "2401", whereas special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates) Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of coins acquired in the pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) is "275 coins". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into consideration the amount of gaming value that can be awarded in the pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when a predetermined regulated gaming value amount of gaming value is awarded in an advantageous area in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed immediately after or during the start of a pseudo bonus, the player will feel distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. There are cases where this happens. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a gaming value amount that is less than the gaming value amount for which limit processing (number of payouts) is normally executed is given by the amount of gaming value that can be given per increase section (275 coins). By occasionally executing special limit processing (number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful or lost due to the pseudo-bonus ending prematurely.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above-mentioned timing. For example, when a gaming value amount that is less than the gaming value amount for which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed is awarded by the amount of gaming value that can be awarded per two increase periods (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins). A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. For example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the amount of gaming value that can be awarded per increase period (275 coins) + grace period is equivalent to the amount of gaming value that can be granted per increase period (275 coins) + the amount of gaming value for which limit processing (number of payouts) is normally executed. A special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount less than the game value amount (8 pieces) is awarded. In other words, the special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed (activated) at any timing before the normal limit process (number of payouts). It is assumed that settings can be made as appropriate depending on the game specifications, etc.

For semi-limit processing (number of games), add "1" to the value of the control game counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it becomes "with ceiling shortening"), add "1" to the value of the 1G continuous counter. ) is multiplied by "55" (that is, the period during which the pseudo bonus can be continued), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1390" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". ”, the semi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (activated).

For semi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout number counter and the value of the 1G continuous counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it is "with ceiling shortening"), add "1". ) is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given as a pseudo bonus), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1851" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and it is "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout number counter is "1301". ”, the semi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (activated). Note that semi-limit processing (number of games) and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) both have the same restrictions, so after one operating condition is established and activated, the other operating condition will be applied. Even if this holds true, there is no need for it to operate redundantly.

When the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery will be executed during the pseudo bonus in a series of subsequent advantageous sections. It will no longer be done. That is, the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is suppressed. Note that the method for suppressing the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the probability of winning the 1G consecutive lottery may be set to be lower than usual, and in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be set to be lower than usual. . That is, although the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed, it may be made so that it is difficult to win these lots. Further, for example, in the production section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that becomes a winning prize in the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, in the mode transition lottery, the lottery value at which a mode transition advantageous to the player is determined may be lowered to make it difficult for pseudo bonuses to be won consecutively.

In addition, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, the "determined hand" (( A special process is performed when a) is won. Hereinafter, this special processing will be explained using as an example a case where the "confirmed combination" is "F_confirmed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "confirmed cherry").

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "certain cherry" is won during the performance period (may be during the increase period), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery occurs. ``Winning (next game)'' is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). In addition, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a highly anticipated symbol for the player, so in games where information about stop operations is not reported, the player The general procedure is to perform the stop operation in one stop and aiming at the "cherry" symbol (as a guideline, aiming at the "BAR" symbol). Therefore, when a game is played according to the general procedure, when a "determined cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower row of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "confirmed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2" ”) may be made. Further, "winning (next game)" is not limited to a pseudo bonus starting from the next game, but may also mean a pseudo bonus starting from the next game or later.

Here, a skilled player also aims at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R and stops, in order to further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "certain cherry". Perform operations. As a result, the "BAR" symbols line up in the middle of each reel, and it can be recognized that the "confirmed cherry" has been won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player, for example, may not or may not be able to perform the stop operation while aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, and the stop display may appear to be a "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "determined cherry" (for example, see "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, when a "confirmed cherry" is won, the "confirmed cherry reply" is not activated. When a combination of symbols is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" and the "Confirmed Cherry Lip" symbol combination is not displayed, but the "Cherry Lip" symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound will also be played. It is now output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100%, or with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if you win a "certain cherry", at the start of the next game, "red 7" ” will be performed and it will be announced that the pseudo bonus will start, and the pseudo bonus will start.

On the other hand, if a "guaranteed cherry" is won during the production period (or may be during the increase period) after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus will be transferred. Although the "win (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "win (the current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the current game, it is announced that a "red 7" effect will be performed and a pseudo bonus will be started, and the pseudo bonus will be started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation is performed to display the "Middle Rip" symbol combination without displaying the "Confirmed Cherry Rip" symbol combination (including the "Cherry Rip" symbol combination). Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, the flow of the game was changed from displaying "confirmed cherry reply" to starting a pseudo bonus from the next game. After either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus starts from the current game → a stop operation is performed according to the special notification, and a game called "middle rep" is displayed. The flow will be changed to Note that the special notification may be performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and from the viewpoint that the player will not be disadvantaged even though it will shift to a pseudo bonus as a result. The control may be performed only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

In addition, if you win a "confirmed cherry" after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, and even though a special notification has been made, the "confirmed cherry" When the symbol combination “Cherry Rip” is displayed, no special winning sound is output.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure for the stop operation is not notified. For this reason, assuming that the stop operation procedure is announced and the "Middle Reply" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a situation occurs, one of the The player will clearly recognize that the semi-limit process has been activated, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any semi-limit process is activated (or it may be after the activation of any quasi-limit process), "F_Replay A" or When "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be made when the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is won. In addition, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transfer lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if it is configured such that "Win (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Up to this point, we have explained using the example of monitoring the gaming period in the advantageous section using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" in order to activate the normal limit processing, special limit processing, and semi-limit processing. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when each limit process is executed, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter. The presence or absence of ceiling shortening (that is, the variable for activating the quasi-limit process), etc. can be changed as appropriate according to game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the gaming period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if you use the "Navi count" to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, you can use normal limit processing (Navi count), special limit processing (Navi count), or semi-limit processing (Navi count) in the same way as above. (number of times) can also be executed. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be used to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, and the value at which limit processing is normally performed for the adopted element. By defining a value for which special limit processing is executed, and a value for which quasi-limit processing is executed, each limit process can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is controlled for a predetermined period (for example, , the value of the number of advantageous section games counter is "1500" or more), or the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the number of advantageous section payout counters is "2401" or more). ), this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445") or above), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), If the vehicle is in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections are terminated when the vehicle transitions to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, advantageous section). When the value of the section game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more) When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more) , or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), an advantageous state If not, the system shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections ends.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. Moreover, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if the condition is not advantageous, it is changed to an advantageous condition and then terminated. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the period during which an advantageous state can continue (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be awarded (for example, "275 coins"). Therefore, while giving due consideration to the emotions of the players, it is possible to prevent the amount of gaming value given to the players from being extremely restricted.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections is limited to a specific period. When the special period is shorter and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), Or, when the amount of gaming value awarded in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control payout counter is at the semi-limit) When the processing (number of payouts) reaches a value that is executed, the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, the player may be granted more rights than he or she can consume, and in such a situation, a series of advantageous sections will be forcibly terminated, causing the player to feel a sense of distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," it is important to note that, for example, when the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount" are Even if there is a difference between the amount of gaming value that was originally awarded and the amount of gaming value that was actually awarded, the calculation is based on the amount of gaming value that was originally supposed to be awarded, without taking this difference into account. It is about to be done. As a result, the series of advantageous sections may be extended unnecessarily due to the actions of such players, and unfairness may arise between players who have committed such actions and players who have not. Since it is possible to prevent players from putting the game away, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, a player wins a fixed combination (for example, a "fixed cherry") that is guaranteed to transition to an advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed (for example, a state after semi-limit processing is activated). When this happens, a special notification is made to prevent the display of special symbol combinations (for example, "confirmed cherry rip") that can clearly recognize the winning of this confirmed combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the confirmed winning combination was a useless winning. In other words, in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when an advantageous state has started, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, while also making the game more enjoyable. This makes it possible to consider people's feelings as well. Note that any effect execution means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is given, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to start from the next game starts from the current game. This allows the player to perform the stop operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even when such a special notification is issued. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed due to a winning combination, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, when the granting of rights is suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed in a winning combination, it is not possible to make a special notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the confirmed winning combination was a useless winning. In other words, in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when an advantageous state has started, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, while also making the game more enjoyable. This makes it possible to consider people's feelings as well. Note that any performance execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, the first gaming machine determines whether or not to make a special notification depending on whether or not a confirmed winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been made. I'm trying to decide. Thereby, the situation in which special notification is performed can be managed more appropriately.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter perform counting regardless of the amount of betted game value, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state, This allows normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) to be executed.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the 3-card bet state, but do not perform counting in the 2-card bet state. Therefore, in the 3-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed, but in the 2-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed. Processing (number of payouts) is not allowed to be executed. Therefore, in a two-card bet state, the series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during a pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit process (number of games) or the normal limit process (number of payouts).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of the small winning combination and the number of medals paid out are different between the 3-piece bet state and the 2-piece bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15), and the 3-piece bet state is different. The player is at a disadvantage when playing a game with two bets than when playing a game with . However, the method in which the player is disadvantaged when playing a game with two bets is not limited to this. For example, if a game is played with two bets during a pseudo bonus, the procedure for stopping the game may not be notified, thereby putting the player at a disadvantage.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a game is played with a first amount of gaming value (for example, "3 coins") being bet, a series of advantageous sections are forced in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that On the other hand, if a second amount of gaming value (for example, "2 coins") is bet and a game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible for the player to realize that he or she did not play the game using the intended gaming method, thereby encouraging the player to play the game using the intended gaming method.

Furthermore, in a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the second amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played than when the first amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played. Therefore, by making it possible to call attention to this, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous situation, and to prevent the player from playing the game in a way that is not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to this.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and symbol code storage area will be described. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the storage areas described above is composed of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by 1 byte of data. Although the data stored in each storage area is only 1-byte data in the "Data" column in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, the symbol combinations associated with the bits in each storage area are shown in FIG. The "combinations" shown (in FIG. 17, the symbols on reel 3L, the symbols on reel 3C, and the symbols on reel 3R are described in this order) and their contents (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that corresponds to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in the current game). It is used to For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed combination (that is, the type of symbol combination displayed on the active line in the current game). used for For example, if a combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the active line in the current game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on the active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is rotating. used for For example, in this game, when at least one of the reels is rotating, if the combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the active line, "1" is set in bit 0 of storage area 1. is stored.

(Carryover win storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the configuration of the carryover winning combination storage area will be explained. The carryover combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when a bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as an internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored in the carryover combination storage area as a carryover combination ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed on the active line. In addition, while the carryover winnings are stored in the carryover winnings storage area, the carryover winnings (bonus winnings) are stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winnings determined by the internal lottery process (minor winnings/replay winnings). be done.

(Game status flag storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be described. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Note that in the first gaming machine, since the RT state is not provided, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. Note that in the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section is stored separately in a mode flag storage area, which will be described later. You can also. Further, the same applies to the game sections of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. It is possible to provide an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game status flag in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and the ART state. It is possible to provide an AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game state flag in this gaming state flag storage area.

(mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Further, for example, if the current mode is Heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Furthermore, bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of stopped reel), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the currently pressed stop button, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, it is a valid stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the press order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The press order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Note that the pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, that is, the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the press order storage area. Next, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. will be stored. Next, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but "1" remains stored in bit 1. "0" is now stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order for the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be explained with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. In addition, in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing content may be explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing content of the various processes shown below is limited to this. It's not a thing.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. FIG. 23 also shows power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, various processes necessary when the power is turned on are performed. Note that details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as a winning flag storage area or a winning activation flag storage area where data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, etc. are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception/start check process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random value acquisition processing (S4). In this process, random numbers for internal lottery (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for performance (other random numbers for lottery) used in various kinds of lottery related to gameplay (for example, in the range of 0 to 65,535, or 0 to 255 range), etc., and the various extracted random numbers are stored in a random number storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the manner in which various random numbers are obtained is not limited to the above. The required number of random values can be obtained as appropriate from each predetermined numerical range (for example, the range 0 to 65535, the range 0 to 32767, the range 0 to 255, or the range 0 to 127, etc.). .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining an internal winning combination are performed based on an internal lottery table and random numbers for internal lottery depending on the current gaming state and the like. Note that details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game start state control processing (S6). In this process, for various game states, when a game starts, if a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is transitioned according to the established transition condition. , or perform various processes necessary to manage the gaming period of the current gaming state. The details of the state control process at the start of the game will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, data of a start command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in a communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32), which will be described later. Furthermore, the methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs main-side performance control processing at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when starting a game and performing various effects under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side), various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the start of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, for example, when the instruction monitor is in the AT state and informs information of a stop operation, the manner of the notification is controlled. Further, although the details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table used in the current game and the type of attraction priority table, is set based on the internal winning combination, the game state, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start processing (S10). This process requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) described later, and the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 3C, 3R is controlled. Rotation begins. Each reel that has started rotating is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, although the details are omitted, in this process, a reel rotation start command generation and storage process is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an attraction priority order storage process (S11). In this process, the pull-in priority is determined for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reels (all reels in this case) by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority table. The data shown is acquired and stored in an attraction priority order data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, a symbol code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R. Perform various processing necessary for this purpose. Note that details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is any combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although the details are omitted, in this process, a winning activation command generation and storage process is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/replay operation processing (S14). In this process, if the symbol combination determined in the winning operation determination process described above is a combination of symbols related to a small role, the corresponding number of medals will be paid out, and if it is a combination of symbols related to a replay role, the number of medals will be paid out for the next time. Performs various processes necessary to activate replay in a game. For example, if the symbol combination determined in the winning operation determination process described above is a symbol combination related to a replay combination, the same value as the number of bets in the current game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter described below. Perform the processing to do. Further, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game end state control process (S15). In this process, for each game state, when a game ends, if a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a combination of displayed symbols, etc.), the game state is transitioned according to the established transition condition. , or perform various processes necessary to manage the gaming period of the current gaming state. The details of the state control process at the end of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs main side performance control processing at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side) when the game ends, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the end of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although the details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-described processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the configuration may be such that processes other than these processes are performed as necessary, or the configuration may be configured such that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on process performed in S1 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (not shown) upon power-on, then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally as a result of the test. S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (S21: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the settings can be changed.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when changing settings (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a carryover combination storage area, a gaming state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or other storage area where data needs to be erased when changing settings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, after the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation, new setting values are set (stored) in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. be done. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is turned off (S26). That is, after a new setting value is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the state in which settings can be changed has ended.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S26: YES), initialization command generation and storage processing is performed (S27). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off (at the time of power outage) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (S28: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S29). In this process, the pachi-slot machine 1 is returned to the state before the power cutoff. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), and if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), an error occurs when the power is turned on. Processing is performed (S30). It should be noted that the error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the above-mentioned reset operation, but is resolved in response to a new set value being set. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power of the pachi-slot machine 1, and thereafter operates normally until a new set value is set (until the above-mentioned processes S22 to S26 are performed). The process does not proceed (S2 and subsequent steps in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception/start check processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal reception/start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the medal reception/start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay winning combination was won in the previous unit game (replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal input signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the process in S42, it performs a medal auxiliary storage switch check process (S43). In this process, it is determined whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on (that is, whether a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on. If it is determined that it is in the on state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, processing is put on hold until the error is resolved. Further, if it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the on state, this process is ended.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits are checked, and it is also determined whether acceptance of medals is prohibited or a selector error has occurred, and if it is possible to accept medals, the number of medals is Set the state to a state in which reception is possible (state in which bet operations can be received) (to permit reception of medals). Note that if a selector error has occurred, the process is on standby until the error is resolved.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to accept medals (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that medals can be accepted (S45: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the bet switch 6S. Further, although details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal input signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medal insertion or credit is possible (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not possible to insert medals or credit (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (S49 is NO) , prohibits acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 is in a state where it is not possible to accept medals (a state where it is not possible to accept bet operations).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that it is not possible to accept medals (NO in S45), in S47 it determines that it is possible to insert medals or credit (YES in S47), After the process of S48, it is determined whether the number of inserted coins is the number of coins that can start playing (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of coins inserted is the number of coins that can be used to start the game (S49: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has performed a start operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is turned on (S50: YES), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal reception/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of coins inserted is not the number that can start the game (NO in S49), and if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the on state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 performs processing. is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking the set value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set value, the number of bets, the gaming state, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains an internal lottery random number value from the random number storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the internal lottery random number value acquired in S4 of the above-described main process. In addition, in this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred. Then, the above-mentioned power-on error process (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal winning combination determination processing (S64). In this process, the obtained internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (for example, by addition update) using the lottery value of each internal lottery combination specified in the internal lottery table that has been set, and the updated result becomes a predetermined result. (for example, overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of the current unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not obtained even after determining all the internal winning combinations, the result of the current unit game will be a "loss" (a "loss" will be determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the process returns to S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (and sequentially updates the random numbers for internal lottery) until all internal winning combinations are determined (or if the internal winning combinations are determined midway through the process). (until it is determined) the process of S64 is repeated.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (S65 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover combination (that is, it is not a bonus combination that is a carryover combination, but is a small combination or a replay combination). It is determined whether or not it is a winning combination (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover winning combination (S66: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the winning flag storage area in the data corresponding to the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover winning combination (NO in S66), and after the processing in S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a carryover winning combination ( In other words, it is determined whether the winning combination is a carryover bonus winning combination (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carryover target combination (S68: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus combinations have not been carried over yet. If the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69 is YES), it updates the carryover combination storage area (S70). In this process, data in the carryover winning combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the processing of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the carryover combination storage area in the data corresponding to the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover winning combination (S68 is NO), then in S69 it determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO). ), and after the processing in S70, it is determined again whether the data in the carryover winning combination storage area is "0" (S71).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (S71: NO), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when the bonus combination has been carried over (or won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores data corresponding to the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed in correspondence with the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. ``1'' is stored in the bit.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S71 is YES), and after the process in S72, it performs a sub-flag etc. setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. Note that in this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to information on a stop operation notified by the instruction monitor may be set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from any gaming state to any gaming state are satisfied. For example, when shifting to a flag as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus combination, it is checked in this process whether or not the predetermined bonus combination has been won. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, since the space between the flags is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a gaming state stored in the gaming state flag storage area), there is no need to check here. Further, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific number of games are played after the establishment of a specific transition condition, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S82). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S82 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S84). In this process, depending on the transition of the gaming state, for example, it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In such cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition conditions for transitioning to any gaming state are not satisfied (NO in S82), and after the processing in S84, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether there is one (S85). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S85: YES), it performs a process of checking whether the start condition for an advantageous section is established (S86). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (starting conditions for an advantageous section) are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not this lottery result is the one that starts the advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (S87: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous section. In this process, in response to the start of an advantageous section, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes start counting (that is, start monitoring the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections), etc. Perform the setting process as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) during the started advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, in accordance with the set destination mode, when transitioning to a pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the gaming period, and the game transitions to the end mode. In this case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and in the case of transitioning to other modes, the corresponding number of ceiling games is set. In addition, lottery values (lottery table) for various types of lottery (see FIGS. 7 and 8, etc.) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85: NO), it performs processing at the start of a game during an advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check whether the advantageous section end condition is met (S92). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (conditions for ending the advantageous section) are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the operating conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode. In this step, it is checked whether 32 games have elapsed or not.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition for the advantageous section is not satisfied (S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the advantageous section game start process performed in S91 of the game start state control process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of games during the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the gaming period such as various modes (playing states) during the advantageous period, or other counters are used. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtraction (addition) by 1 for each game, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S102). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the playing period in the AT state (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets) at the start of the game, it is determined whether the execution conditions for such an extension are satisfied or not. Based on the result of this determination, processing such as extending the gaming period is performed (if it is possible to shorten the playing period in the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state gaming period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the AT state gaming period is managed in the process of S101 described above, and this process only deals with the extension. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. Processing is performed for this purpose.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs navigation setting processing (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command, etc. are set. Note that in this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. In other words, when the notification target winning combination is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily occur. The determination may be made according to the probability of occurrence).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S102), and after S104, the main CPU 101 determines whether a mode transition condition is satisfied (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the destination mode has been determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the advantageous section to which the mode has been transferred. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode is set, which is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a process similar to the process of S90 described above is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the start of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S105), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

The state control process at the start of the game shown in FIG. 27, the state control process at the end of the game shown in FIG. 30, the process at the start of the game during the advantageous period shown in FIG. 28, and the process at the end of the game during the advantageous period shown in FIG. Basically, they have almost the same processing configuration. This process may be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends (for example, a process that refers to the determined internal winning combination, such as changing the game state or mode, etc.) Processing where the processing result only needs to be reflected until the end of the current game (or until the start of the next game) means that it only needs to be performed in either one, and the same applies to both. This does not mean that the processing is performed redundantly. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends.

On the other hand, processing that needs to be performed when starting a game (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting process, etc.) shall be performed when starting the game, and when the game ends. Processing that needs to be performed (for example, processing that refers to the combination of displayed symbols) may be performed when the game ends. Also, for example, there are cases where processing needs to be performed at a predetermined time after the start of the game and before the end of the game, or cases where it is better to perform the process (for example, a process that refers to the stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) may be carried out at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotational speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations/minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until all the reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (S111: YES), each reel is allowed to stop (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Additionally, the operation stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until a valid stop button is operated. In addition, when performing automatic stop control, the standby time can be measured and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bits in the operation stop button storage area are "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle region of the reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs sliding piece number determination processing (S117). In this process, for example, the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (symbol movement amount) is determined by referring to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table, the data in the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the scheduled stop position from the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the symbol position data of the position where the symbol will finally stop based on the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above is stored as the planned stop position. .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop command generation and storage processing (S119). In this process, data of a reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can include parameters that can specify not only the scheduled stop position but also the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs symbol code storage processing (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether there are any reels that are still rotating (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

If the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), it performs control change processing (S122). In this process, depending on the player's stop operation mode up to this point, for example, if it is necessary to change the stop table, attraction priority table, etc. set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process, such changes may be made. Reset various information necessary for stop control.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an attraction priority order storage process (S123). In this process, each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reels is set as the set internal winning combination while also referring to the type of symbol at the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the attraction priority is obtained by referring to the attraction priority order table, and is stored in the attraction priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(Status control process at game end)
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from any gaming state to any gaming state are satisfied. For example, when transitioning to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, a check is performed in this process to see if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked in this process whether or not the termination conditions for these gaming states are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S132). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S132 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming status flag storage area, and Set state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, if the termination conditions of these gaming states are satisfied, bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, depending on the transition of the gaming state, for example, it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In such cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and even if the 3BB state is set, the number of payouts is set to "1". For example, "176" is set as the number of payouts as the end condition.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing in S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether there is one (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S135: YES), it performs a process of checking whether the conditions for starting the advantageous section are established (S136). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S86 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the starting conditions for the advantageous section are not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process for starting the advantageous section (S138). Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S88 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) during the started advantageous section. Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S89 described above (game start state control process).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S90 (game start state control process) described above.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S135: NO), it performs processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking whether conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (end conditions for an advantageous section) are satisfied. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the operating conditions of various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts during the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode. In this step, it is checked whether 32 games have elapsed or not.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S143: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied (S143: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the above-mentioned state control processing at the end of the game will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts during an advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing gaming periods such as various modes (gaming states) during an advantageous period, or other counters are used. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S152). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (S152: YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the AT state playing period (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets) at the end of the game, it is determined whether the execution conditions for such an extension are satisfied or not. Based on the result of this determination, processing such as extending the gaming period is performed (if it is possible to shorten the playing period in the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state gaming period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the AT state gaming period is managed in the process of S151 described above, and this process only deals with the extension. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the result of this lottery.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (S152 is NO), and after S153, the main CPU 101 determines whether mode transition conditions are satisfied (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the destination mode has been determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the advantageous section to which the mode has been transferred. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode is set, which is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a process similar to the process of S140 described above is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the end of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S154 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of periodic interrupt processing.

Here, in this embodiment, the period of periodic interrupt processing (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the cycle of periodic interrupt processing is not limited to this. For example, periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the interrupt processing may actually be executed for some or all of the processing. By setting the number of interrupts to "2" or more, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a different cycle as a result.

First, the main CPU 101 performs register saving processing (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). In this process, the input states (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt and the input state at the time of the current interrupt are compared to check whether there has been a change in the input state, and if there is a change in the input state, the input state of the main RAM 103 is The change is stored in port storage area 0 (not shown), and input states that are not related to the change are stored as they are in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this process, the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled, and the rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled. Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. In this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 is sent to the sub control circuit 200 as an input status command.

Note that in this embodiment, various command data are once stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in periodic interrupt processing. It may be configured such that the information is not stored but is directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in this embodiment, although detailed explanation is omitted, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by serial communication. For example, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by parallel communication. It may also be configured such that the information is sent to

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door opening/closing check process (S208). In this process, for example, the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. Note that when various error states occur and when the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by sub control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the outline of the sub-side control process.

In addition, in the Pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modification. There are not many restrictions on the 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can be used in various ways depending on the type and number of effect devices to be connected, the type of effect performed by the effect devices, and the manufacturing cost. configuration can be used. That is why it is labeled as "Summary" in FIG. 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs power-on processing similarly to the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). This process detects whether an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializes the data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and performs various tasks necessary to perform various production execution control processes described below. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it performs a production execution control process upon command reception (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if settings have been changed, initialization processing is executed on the sub side as appropriate, and the settings must be changed. If so, processing is also executed on the sub side to restore the state to the state before the power cut.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if it is in a non-AT state, the content of the production that suggests or informs internal winning combinations, gaming status, etc. (as necessary) (by lottery), and controls various production devices so that the production of the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if it is in the AT state, in addition to this, it determines the content of the performance to notify the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls various performance devices so that the performance of the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, it refers to the parameter information of the received lock command, determines the content of the performance that is linked to the content of the lock performance, and creates various performances so that the determined content is executed. Control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to and linked with the stop start position and planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) The content of the performance is determined and various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the determined content is executed. For example, when a winning activation command is received, the information on the parameters of the received winning activation command is referred to, and when a bonus is awarded, the content of the performance that is linked to the bonus to be awarded is determined, and the determined content is The various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation is performed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), and for example, when the production buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the sub-CPU 201 executes production when the production button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when a performance button corresponding to the performance is operated during execution of the operation-linked performance, various performance devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked performance changes. Further, for example, when a presentation button is operated to call up a user menu, which will be described later, while not playing a game, control is performed to display the user menu. Further, when a presentation button is operated for selection/decision operation while the user menu is displayed, control is performed in accordance with these operations.

Further, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other production execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, if the non-operation period in which no operation related to the game or user menu is performed is a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demonstration status notification is determined and determined. The various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is equipped with various functions for controlling games, various functions for controlling performances, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have functions. Note that an example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the game parlor side will be described below.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's performance operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and the appropriate selection/decision operation is performed for the selected menu, the player can obtain various information. , it is possible to make various settings.

For example, if "Arrangement/Payout Table" is selected/determined, it is possible to confirm the symbol arrangement in the Pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the game information showing the payout (contents of benefits) when winning the prize. The following information screen is displayed on the performance display section.

For example, when "volume/light intensity adjustment" is selected/determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light intensity of the lamp/LED group, etc. are set. A possible setting screen is displayed on the performance display section. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

For example, when "Custom" is selected/determined, the production mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the production, the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character, etc.) or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of production occurrence (including the type of expectation when the production occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (production execution timing) etc.) A setting screen is displayed on the effect display section where the settings can be made. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

Further, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected/determined, it is possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.). In such information providing services, for example, a player logs in to start a game (it is also possible to start a game without logging in), and when the game ends, logs out, thereby providing gaming history information (e.g. , information corresponding to the results of various games, such as the total number of games played, how many times an advantageous game state occurred, the maximum number of coins obtained, etc.) can be confirmed or obtained.

For example, the game history information may include information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output, depending on the game result (the fulfillment of the opening condition), Information regarding accompanying benefits is also included, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of songs that can be output.

Note that various methods can be used for logging in and logging out in such an information providing service. For example, using the player's terminal, the player may be able to log in and log out by having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display section, or the player may enter a password. (Specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, instead of a two-dimensional code, a string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for next input, and The password can be obtained by the player writing it down on paper or taking a photo with a mobile device, etc., and the password obtained in this way can be entered when logging in before the next game starts). - You may be able to log out. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform login and logout by appropriately combining these methods.

[8-2. Game store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (this may be a setting change operation or other operation by the game hall administrator) by the game parlor administrator, and the desired menu is selected from the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected/determined, the game parlor manager can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen on which the date and time of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the production display section. Note that the date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the above-described sub-side power-on process (see S302 in FIG. 33).

For example, when "total medal information" is selected and determined, history information indicating the number of coins inserted and number of coins paid out within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of seven business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the performance display section. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu.

For example, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected/determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations in the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days), etc. An information screen is displayed on the effect display section where history information indicating the information can be confirmed. For example, if "error information history" is selected/determined, history information indicating the date and time of error occurrence and its contents within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of 7 business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is also provided. An information screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows confirmation of the information.

For example, if "monitoring history" is selected/determined, history information indicating the date and time the door was opened within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of 7 business days), the period, etc. of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the performance display section. Further, for example, when "warning setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows setting of the mode, frequency, etc. of various warning notifications in the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, for example, when "power saving mode setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

Further, for example, when "stop-stop setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the stop-stop function in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that the discontinuation function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, disables the game until a cancellation operation (for example, a reset operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be established, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increased section, or an advantageous section). It may be made to be established when any of the sections (including the performance section) ends. Moreover, when the cancellation function is set to the ON state, an automatic payment function, which will be described later, may also be set to the ON state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when "automatic payment setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the automatic payment function in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that the automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (that is, all credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is met. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be established, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increased section, or an advantageous section). It may be made to be established when any of the sections (including the performance section) ends. Moreover, when the automatic payment function is set to the ON state, the above-mentioned cancellation function may also be set to the ON state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the cancellation function or automatic payment function, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to settings, various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations are provided. can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (that is, the operation unit that accepts production operations). However, in this case, it is also undesirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, so only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the setting. It may be possible to do so.

[9. Expansion example]
Up to this point, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as so-called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines," and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine that is capable of playing a game (performing game control) in accordance with a player's gaming action (operation). Further, the configuration and functions of the gaming machine including the pachi-slot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and expansions are possible. An example of such expansion will be described below, although it is just an example.

(pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine includes, for example, a game board having a game area where game balls can roll and fall, a glass door including a protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, and an effect display device provided in a predetermined area of the game area. (It may be provided outside the gaming area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit that includes various control boards that perform various controls related to games and performances, and these are connected to the frame ( (sometimes simply referred to as a "frame" etc.).

In addition, on the front side of the pachinko machine, for example, there is a firing handle as one of the player's operating means, an upper tray that can store game balls to be used in the game, and a lower tray that can store the game balls that are put out. etc. are provided. Note that many of them are provided with the above-mentioned presentation buttons and movable presentation devices. In addition, the gaming area includes, for example, a starting area (sometimes referred to as a "starting hole" etc.) through which a game ball can pass, a specific area (sometimes referred to as a "V winning hole" etc.), A variable winning device (sometimes referred to as a "big winning hole" etc.) that can change between a state in which it is easy for game balls to win a prize and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize, and identification information (also referred to as a "design" etc.). In some cases, a variable display device or the like is provided that can variably display ``special symbols'' and ``normal symbols''.

In the pachinko machine, a player plays a game by operating a firing handle and firing a game ball into a gaming area. For example, when the fired game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display starts. In addition, at this time, whether or not to transition the gaming state with a probability depending on the current state (for example, whether it is a variable gaming state with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area, etc. It is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state that is advantageous to the player (in other words, it is determined (or determined) whether or not to shift the gaming state). Thereafter, when a condition for stopping the variable display (for example, the set variable time has ended) is satisfied, the variable display is stopped in a stopping manner according to the above determination result. At this time, if the above-determined result is to shift the gaming state (win), the stopping mode to be stopped will also be the display result corresponding to the win, and the corresponding display result will correspond to the win. Shift to the gaming state. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned determination result does not cause the game state to shift (miss), the stopping mode to be stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the shift, and the game state does not shift. For example, when a fired game ball passes through a specific area (the specific area is often in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), the game state is displayed regardless of the variable display device. It is decided to migrate.

That is, in the Pachislot machine 1, the game is started when the player bets the necessary medals and performs a start operation, whereas in the Pachinko machine, the game is started when the player operates the handle to fire the necessary game balls. Although they differ in that, for example, the game is started when the game ball passes through the starting area, they both have the same point that the game is started by the player's game action. Furthermore, the pachislot machine 1 and the pachinko machine have in common that the stop mode in which display is finally permitted (in other words, the content of the privilege to be granted) is determined when the start opportunity is established. .

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, the variable display is basically stopped by the player's stop operation, whereas in the pachinko machine, the variable display is stopped by the satisfaction of the stop condition (not by the player's stop operation). Although they are different in that the variable display is stopped, they both have the same feature in that the variable display is stopped according to a predetermined result and a benefit is given according to the stopping mode. Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 1 and the pachinko machine have in common that they can perform performances related to games. For example, the effect display device functions as the above-described effect display section or information display section. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the pachinko machine may also be provided with performance execution means such as the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other performance devices, and the performance may be performed using these.

Note that in many pachinko machines, decorative patterns (which may also be referred to as "identification information" or the like) are displayed in a variable manner in the effect display device. As mentioned above, the original game results are displayed on the variable display device, but the variable display device is configured to be small, and the display results are also displayed in a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs. Therefore, in many cases, it is difficult for players to recognize game results. For this reason, in most pachinko machines, the game is played by displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner (and in a static manner) on the effect display device in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device. . In addition, such a fluctuating display of a decorative pattern may be performed (for production purposes, the fluctuating display may be started after a certain period of delay when a start opportunity is established, or may be temporarily stopped before a stop condition is met). Basically, similar to the above-mentioned variable display device, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped manner as the game progresses. ), and in the case of a miss, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a non-special stopping mode (for example, a random pattern). Therefore, this is considered to be one mode of the variable display section mentioned above. It is also possible to apply the invention according to the embodiment.

That is, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 are those that have characteristics unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced with game balls, etc.) ) can be applied to the external structure or internal structure of a pachinko machine.

In addition, in pachinko machines, various controls related to games are performed by a main control circuit as a game control unit mounted on the main control board (partly, control related to payout is performed by a main control circuit that is electrically connected to the main control board). Various controls related to production are performed by a sub-control circuit as a production control section mounted on a sub-control board, so The various items described as the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be applied as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, except for those that have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, those related to stop operations).

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, as described above, the gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration) include the bonus state, RT state, AT state, It is possible to provide an ART state or the like that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, by making the lottery mode of the minor role more advantageous than in the non-bonus state, it is possible to continue a state in which medals are easily awarded (increase) for a certain period of time, and in the RT state, the lottery mode of the minor role is made more advantageous than in the non-bonus state. By making the lottery mode more advantageous than the non-RT state, it is possible to maintain a state in which winnings are less likely to occur (as a result, medals are less likely to decrease), and in the AT state, the more advantageous stop operation mode is By being notified, it is possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increase) for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, pachinko machines can also be provided with various game states having similar characteristics. For example, in a jackpot game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently than usual, so that the game ball can be changed to a state where it is easy to win, and thereby the game ball is awarded. This makes it possible to continue a state of easy (increasing) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving gaming state (sometimes referred to as an "electrical support state", etc.), a different control than usual is performed on the normal symbols to make it easier for the game ball to pass through the starting area. This makes it possible to increase the lottery frequency by the variable display device and to maintain a state in which the number of game balls is difficult to decrease for a certain period of time. Further, for example, in a variable probability game state, special symbols are controlled differently than usual, so that a state in which the probability of winning by the variable display device increases (as a result, the number of game balls is likely to increase) continues for a certain period of time. is possible.

That is, in this embodiment, various matters explained as the configuration of control regarding the transition (or transition) of the game state as the gameplay of the pachi-slot machine 1 are those that have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the It can be applied as a control configuration regarding the transition (or transition) of the gaming state of a pachinko machine, except for those that involve transition, etc.). Further, the same applies to various other matters described as the game performance of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Although this is a time-saving gaming state, pachinko machines can also shift to a time-saving gaming state when the number of games played during the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) reaches a specified number of times. There is. That is, even in a pachinko machine, if a ceiling function (unfavorable state (e.g., normal gaming state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without shifting to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state), The various matters described as the configuration of the ceiling function of the pachislot machine 1 are the configuration of the ceiling function of the pachinko machine. It can be applied as

In addition, although it is a time-saving gaming state, even in a pachinko machine, if the stop mode of the variable display device becomes a display result corresponding to a specific loss during a non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), It is possible to use this as an opportunity to shift to a time-saving gaming state. In other words, even in pachinko machines, it is possible to transition (transition) the gaming state by displaying a specific display result (a specific combination of symbols) (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot gaming state, etc.). , the various matters described as a configuration regarding the transition (transition) of the RT state due to the display of a specific combination of symbols of the pachislot machine 1 are described as the configuration regarding the transition (transition) of the time-saving gaming state due to the display of a specific display result of the pachinko machine. Can be applied.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's bet operation (that is, the operation of inserting the medals in hand into the medal slot 5 and placing a bet, or placing the credited medals on the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button) The game is started with one of the starting conditions being that there is an operation (operating 6b to place a bet), and if there is a payout of medals when the game ends, the hopper device 32 is driven and the medal payout port 11 is activated. Although the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, for all formats in which a player bets the gaming value necessary for a game, plays a game based on that bet, and is awarded a benefit (for example, a gaming value is awarded) based on the result of the game, this book applies. The invention according to the embodiment is applicable. In other words, in addition to physically inserting (spending) and paying out medals through the player's actions, the game value held by the player is managed electromagnetically within the Pachislot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, it is also possible to manage the game value in a manner that does not allow the player to directly contact the game value, and to enable games without medals. Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine." Note that medalless gaming machines are sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines", "enclosed gaming machines", etc.

Note that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player, or it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) that is attached to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may also be a (connected) gaming value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal number control board"). An example in which this gaming value management device is provided will be explained below.

The gaming value management device is a device that includes at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the pachislot machine 1, and is a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device will be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") via an external gaming value providing device (such as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication. The gaming value management device performs the gaming value lending operation (i.e., provides the gaming value necessary for the player to perform the gaming value betting operation) by performing the necessary communication with the external gaming value providing device. (i.e., the action of providing the player with the gaming value related to the award when the winning role is won (the winning combination is established), etc.); The player shall be able to perform actions such as electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by the action. Note that the gaming value providing device is sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming media) handling device," "gaming value (gaming media) lending device," or "sand."

In addition, the external gaming value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server), and the gaming value management device communicates with the external ball output management device through communication devices and external gaming value management devices. It is configured to be able to transmit ball release management information via the providing device. Here, the put-out ball management information is composed of various kinds of information necessary for an external ball-out management device to manage the put-out balls. Note that an example of the ball release management information will be described later. Furthermore, the external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, via an Internet line.

Here, the term "balls paid out" directly means the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, for example, the term "balls paid out" refers to the difference number (net increase) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number paid out. The extent to which benefits are given to players (for example, how much the player has gained (how much has the game store lost), or how much has the player lost (how much has the game store gained)? The concept also includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling expected by a combination of these.

Further, for example, a possessed gaming value number display device (not shown) is provided on the front side of the Pachislot machine 1 to display the number of held gaming values, and the gaming value management device is configured to control the number of game values based on the management result of the number of gaming values held. The number of game values displayed on the held game value number display device of the lever may be managed. That is, the gaming value management device may be configured to not only record the total number of gaming values that a player can use for gaming using an electromagnetic method, but also to be able to control the display of the recorded results. . In this case, the gaming value management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming values to the external gaming value providing device, and also allows the player to It has the ability to not reduce the number of recorded game values except when directly operated, and the signal indicating the number of recorded game values can only be transmitted through a communication device. is desirable.

Note that the gaming value management device not only has the function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of a player using an external gaming value providing device, but also controls the number of gaming values bet based on the player's physical movements and the number of gaming values bet by the player's physical movements. The player may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical action of the player. That is, it may also be possible to manage the actual insertion and payout of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method or by a method such as the medalless game machine described above, so no matter which specification the pachi-slot machine 1 has. Even if there is a common configuration, it is possible to have a common configuration. Further, in this case, it is possible to adopt a method in which the gaming value management device directly controls the above-mentioned selector 31 and hopper device 32, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71), It is also possible to adopt a method of indirect control by transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a rental operating means and a return (payment) operating means, which can be operated by a player. In addition, the gaming value providing device includes various devices such as an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (for example, an IC card), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for the operation of the medalless gaming machine, such as a loan operating means and a return operating means, which can be operated by a player may be provided (none of which are shown). Note that the insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued on the day at the gaming parlor, but also member recording media owned by members of the gaming parlor. The gaming value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on that day (invalid after the next day), but the gaming value recorded on the member recording medium is valid even after the next day.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be explained. For example, first, the player deposits value into the gaming value providing device using any method. The gaming value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of negotiable values in response to a player's operation on any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with a gaming value corresponding to the subtracted negotiable value. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operations if more gaming value is required. Thereafter, when the player ends the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values based on the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The gaming value management device transmits the number of gaming values to the gaming value providing device in response to the player's operation on any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. The gaming value management device clears the number of gaming values stored in itself when transmitting the number of gaming values. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange place or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, or the player can take the ejected recording medium to a gaming value providing device compatible with other Pachislot machines 1. By inserting it, you can move the machine and continue playing. Further, if the ejected recording medium is a member recording medium, it is valid even after the next day, so the game can be stopped at this point.

Note that in the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. It may be configured such that only the number of game values desired by the player can be transmitted. That is, the game value held by the player may be divided. In addition, the gaming value providing device records the transmitted gaming value number on a recording medium and outputs it, but it uses the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna etc. to send the same value to the player's mobile terminal. For example, cash or cash equivalent may be sent as long as it provides the player with something of equal value.

Additionally, if the pachislot machine 1 is not properly connected to the gaming value providing device (communication-only unit), information corresponding to the number of gaming values is sent to the communication-only unit in response to the player's return operation. , there is a risk that the information will be lost. Therefore, in a state where the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) is not normally connected to the communication dedicated unit, for example, when a game is started, the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) is controlled to an error state, and in the error state, the game is not executed. It may also be possible to control the game so that the game does not proceed by setting it in a state in which it is impossible to do so (for example, in a state in which bet operations, return operations, start operations, etc. are not accepted). This makes it possible to prevent information corresponding to the number of gaming values from disappearing.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device is provided with a lock operating means that can be operated by the player, and communication between the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device is disabled depending on the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the Pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device, for example, setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, for example, some external structures such as the medal slot 5 and the medal payout slot 11, or the selector 31, etc. Since it is not necessary to provide some internal structures such as the hopper device 32, it is possible to reduce not only the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine but also the power consumption of the game machine. Furthermore, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of medalless gaming machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in which the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. Note that, below, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (gaming value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (number of gaming values) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication dedicated unit (gaming value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits ball payout management information to the ball payout management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball output management device is, for example, a server for ball output management managed by an association (an information center) to which gaming machine manufacturers are members, and the transmitted ball output management information is stored in the ball output management device. This is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling performance of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball output performance).

Therefore, from this point of view, since the medal number control board and the connection terminal board play important functions in the pachislot machine 1 like the main control board 71, they should be designed in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. It needs to be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show examples of such aspects.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case like the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing treatments to make it difficult to open (or remove) or to make it possible to recognize traces of it being opened (or the number of times it has been opened). (For example, sealing by caulking, pasting of a seal seal, or pasting of a caulking sticker that records the cutting of the caulk, etc.)

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modification can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration example 2>
In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, unlike configuration example 1 described above, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed inside the case. The board shall be stored so that it is easily visible.

Here, the medal number control board case of configuration example 2 may be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or may be configured to undergo at least a part of the sealing process. You can also do that. For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking in the same way as the main control board case, but a sealing sticker may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is mandatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of stored data>
The example of accumulated data shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data accumulated in the ball output management device. That is, the medal number control board shows an example of the ball output management information transmitted to the ball output management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Note that this is just an example, and a configuration may be adopted in which some of the various information shown in FIG. 34 is not transmitted, or a configuration in which information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34 is transmitted. You can also do it.

Moreover, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-only unit is also arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball output management device is also arbitrary. The information may be transmitted at any timing as long as the ball output management device can monitor the ball output performance of each gaming machine on at least one unit (for example, one business day at a game parlor). . For example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball output management device. Further, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication dedicated unit may be different depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of coins inserted" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's bet operation to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, every unit game), excluding the number bet by the replay operation. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "total number of coins to be paid out" is the cumulative number of coins to be paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded through payout processing of a gaming machine, excluding those awarded through replay operations, to a communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, every unit game). The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum number of difference in the number of coins that occurred during one unit after the power was turned on for each gaming machine (in short, the number of difference in the number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most in one unit. (referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference in the number of medals, and transmits the calculated information to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours at the game parlor), and the communication-only unit transmits the information. is transmitted to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "Total number of coins paid out for accessories" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of coins paid out during the operation of various accessory products. . For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of various accessories at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of various accessories). The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the game parlor).

The accumulated data "Total number of consecutive paid out coins" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. This is the cumulative number of coins paid out during operation. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of a continuous accessory) of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of a gaming machine during the operation of a continuous accessory. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the game parlor).

Further, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the winning ratio monitoring device 54 to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation in the winning ratio monitoring device 54), and the communication-only unit The information is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal number control board). In addition, the accumulated data "accessory object ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned accessory ratio information, the accumulated data "continuous accessory ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "advantageous object ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, for example. For example, the "section ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "instruction accessory ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned accessory ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even during the AT state. The accumulated data "status ratio of accessories, etc." corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even when various accessories are in operation.

The accumulated data "number of games" is the cumulative number of games played per unit after each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played to a communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of the information at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game). For example, the information is transmitted to the ball payout management device at the end of business hours at the game parlor.

The accumulated data "main control chip ID number" is an individual identification number (also referred to as "CPUID", also referred to as "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the individual identification number. Send information including this individual identification number.

The accumulated data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the manufacturer code. Send information including manufacturer code.

The accumulated data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code.

The accumulated data "medal number control chip ID number" is an individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the individual identification number. Send information including this individual identification number. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the manufacturer code. Send information including manufacturer code. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

In this way, the ball output management device is capable of accumulating various types of information (ball output management information) transmitted from gaming machines. Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball output management device can identify the gaming machine that is the sender based on these pieces of individual identification information, and also, for example, from a certain point on, the "main control chip ID number" and "medal number control chip ID number" If the correspondence relationships between the two control boards become different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out).

Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of pieces of ball output information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted coins" to "number of games played") that can identify the ball output performance per unit. Therefore, the ball output management device can recognize whether the gambling quality of the sending gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the ball output information. For example, if the ``total number of coins paid out'' or ``instruction included accessory ratio'' becomes extremely high after a certain point, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out, or there is some flaw in the original specification design. It is possible to recognize the possibility that something has happened.

If the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the ball payout management device, the result will be notified to the game parlor or the game machine manufacturer, and it can be expected that appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, a plurality of managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication dedicated unit) that transmits the ball output management information transmitted from the managed gaming machines to the ball output management device, and each By constructing a management system that includes a ball output management device that manages the ball output performance of the managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of gaming values held by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal number control board may be provided with a medal number monitoring device (not shown) so that the manager of the game parlor can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects and calculates various types of information (for example, part or all of the above-mentioned ball output management information) regarding the number of gaming values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. Incidentally, if all the display contents of the winning ratio monitoring device 54 are displayed by the medal number monitoring device, the winning ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may also be used as a medal number monitor device.

Further, the medal number monitoring device may be mounted on the medal number control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal number control board. Good too. Further, as long as it is within the cabinet G, it may be provided at another location. For example, it may be provided on the medal number control board case. Furthermore, a management switch for starting the display on the medal number monitoring device or for switching its contents may be provided in the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Furthermore, on the premise that such a management switch is used, the information display device 14 may also be used as a medal number monitoring device, for example.

Note that the medal number monitoring device may display the type of error state that has occurred when various error states related to itself occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, a communication error with the connection terminal board, a communication error with the gaming value providing device, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In certain cases, a corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order for the game parlor manager to easily recognize which error condition the displayed value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is displayed on or near the medal number control board case. What is necessary is to provide an explanatory section (such as pasting a sticker or printing) to show the information.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit ball output management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. In this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is additionally provided for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. This not only makes it possible to reduce the number of parts, but also reduces wiring directed to the outside, thereby increasing the security effect.

Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged close to each other at least in the cabinet G. Thereby, work efficiency during connection can be improved. Further, since the length of the wiring can be made constant and the wiring locations can be limited, the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the ball payout management information is transmitted to the ball payout management device. Further, the ball output management device can appropriately manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine based on the transmitted ball output management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball dispensing performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-described limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain restriction condition.

Alternatively, the medal number control board may be provided with a function to appropriately manage the ball output performance, and on the premise that the ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. . That is, it may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain restriction condition.

For example, the medal number control board is configured to include a payout monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). The ball payout monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but monitors the ball payout in such a way that it is not initialized when the advantageous section ends. If the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the advantageous section itself will not be forcibly terminated, but the probability of navigation occurrence will be reduced, the probability that the AT state will be extended, etc. Alternatively, the AT state itself may be terminated to reduce the ball dispensing performance. Even in this case, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball dispensing performance. In addition, in this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball release management device as ball release management information. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which both the medal number control board and the ball output management device can manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of main control board of pachislot machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. Note that, below, a configuration example for reusing the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, in the Pachislot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board management number must be printed on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the management number is a number for identifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer's name and board management number are printed in letters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, it is assumed that a pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Corporation. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" at the bottom are printed. Thereafter, if Model A is removed from the game parlor and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different Pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "Model B"), then AA Co., Ltd. AA laser-engraved the manufacturer's name and board management number printed on the lower row, and in a different space wrote the manufacturer's manufacturing number and board management number related to the company (for example, the manufacturer's name and board management number on the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22" must be newly printed.

Then, after that, model B is removed from the game parlor, and if, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. would have to use laser engraving to delete the manufacturer's name and board management number that had been printed on the top row, and then print a new manufacturing number and board management number related to the company in a different space. However, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, there is no more free space, so even though reuse is still possible in terms of hardware, it is difficult to reuse the main control board 71 due to the above-mentioned restrictions. The problem was that sometimes it was not possible.

Note that this also applies even if multiple manufacturer names and board management numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and board management number for both AA Corporation and BB Corporation are printed in advance, the serial number and board management number for AA Corporation are laser engraved at the time of manufacturing model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although BB Co., Ltd. may be able to reuse the product, AA Co., Ltd. may not be able to reuse it. On the other hand, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 can be expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, it is possible to improve the reusability of a board used for controlling a game, such as the main control board 71.

<Configuration example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 shows printing of a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number, but JAN code (bar code) and other The following code can be used. In other words, the code can be any type of code as long as it contains information that allows the confirming person to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and board control number by some means (e.g., mobile terminal, etc.). Good too.

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. Afterwards, when Model A is removed from the game parlor and AA Corporation attempts to manufacture Model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

Afterwards, when Model B is removed from the game parlor and BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture Model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, even if model C was removed from the game parlor and AA Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. The code is removed by laser engraving, and the fourth code from the right is printed, so that the fourth code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. For example, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

That is, in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Configuration example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, like configuration example 2 described above, shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number is printed. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, assume that two copies of AA Corporation and BB Corporation are printed. In addition, the code can be read by caulking the parts corresponding to each code on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case) with, for example, a belt-shaped member. It is possible to be fixed in an impossible state. Furthermore, for example, by cutting the band-like member or the like, it is possible to release the fixation and make the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, model A was removed from the game parlor, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

After that, Model B was removed from the game parlor, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture Model C, only the third code from the right was readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, even if model C was removed from the game parlor and AA Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. By making only the code readable and making the first to third codes from the right unreadable, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, so further reuse is possible, and further reuse is possible. It can also be reused by many gaming machine manufacturers. In addition, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is also possible to provide only the caulking holes and print a code at the location corresponding to the caulking hole each time the product is reused.

[10. Another example of main control board]
Next, other examples (another configuration example, modification example, and expansion example) of the main control board of the pachi-slot machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 59. It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as another example of the main control board in this embodiment will be explained as other gaming machines (other configuration examples) in this embodiment. Regarding various specifications and functions that are applicable and will be explained as other gaming machines (other configuration examples) in this embodiment, some or all of them will be explained as other examples of the main control board in this embodiment. It is applicable to what is described as. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be a combination of these as appropriate.

[10-1. Pachislot machine equipped with a main control board according to another example]
First, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, a pachi-slot machine (this example will be referred to as a pachi-slot machine 401) equipped with a main control board according to another example will be described. FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 401 on which the main control board 411 is mounted, and FIG. 37 shows the game information display unit 437 provided in the pachi-slot machine 401 on which the main control board 411 is mounted. , is a diagram showing a configuration example of a medal number display unit 441 and a medal lending display unit 442. In addition, in this example, the pachi-slot machine 401 equipped with the main control board 411 according to another example is configured as a medalless gaming machine, but this is just an example, and the configuration is different from the invention described in this example. Of course, devices that do not require the above can also be applied to a gaming machine (Pachi-slot machine 1) in which games are played using physical gaming values.

The pachi-slot machine 401 is configured to be able to play games by having various configurations shown in FIG. Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 401, together with a game medium lending device 402 and peripheral devices 403 such as a data display, constitutes a game system capable of executing various operations related to games. Although not shown in the figure, the game media lending device 402 and peripheral devices 403 such as data displays are connected to the management computer (hall computer) of the game parlor, for example, via a LAN line, and transmit data to the management computer. Configured to send. Furthermore, the game media lending device 402 has the same functions as the above-described game value providing device (communication-only unit).

The pachi-slot machine 401 includes a main control board 411, a sub-control board 412, a door relay board 413, and a sub-relay board 414. The main control board 411 and the door relay board 413, the door relay board 413 and the sub-relay board 414, and the sub-relay board 414 and the sub-control board 412 are electrically connected, respectively. Furthermore, the main control board 411 and the sub-control board 412 are electrically connected via the door relay board 413 and the sub-control board 414 to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 411 to the sub-control board 412. connected.

The main control board 411 includes a main control unit 411a as a game control unit (gaming control unit) that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count as a gaming value control unit (gaming value control unit) that performs control regarding management of gaming value. It has a control section 411b. The main control section 411a has the same function as the above-mentioned main control board 71, and the medal number control section 411b has the same function as the above-mentioned gaming value management device (medal number control board). It is.

Here, in FIG. 36, the main control section 411a and the medal number control section 411b are mounted on the same main control board 411, but they are mounted on separate boards (configured as separate boards). , these may be configured to exhibit similar functions by being electrically connected.

The sub-control board 412 is an effect control board that performs control regarding effects, and has the same functions as the above-described sub-control board 72. Further, the door relay board 413 has the same function as the main relay board 73 described above. Further, the sub-relay board 414 has the same function as the above-described sub-relay board 74.

Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 401 has a power supply unit 415 including a power supply board 415a and a power switch 415b. Note that the power supply unit 415 has the same function as the power supply device 34 described above.

Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 401 includes a reel unit 421, a reset switch 422, a setting key type switch 423, and a payment switch 424, which are electrically connected to the main control section 411a. Note that these may be connected to the main control unit 411a via the door relay board 413. Alternatively, it may be connected to the medal number control section 411b as long as the control is performed smoothly.

The reel unit 421 has the same functions as the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (and stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R) described above. Further, the reset switch 422 has the same function as the reset switch 53 described above. Further, the setting key type switch 423 has the same function as the setting key type switch 52 described above. Further, the payment switch 424 has the same function as the payment switch 9S described above.

However, since the Pachislot machine 401 of this example is configured as a medalless gaming machine, when it is detected by the settlement switch 424 that the corresponding settlement button (not shown) has been pressed, the number of credited medals is is transmitted to the game media lending device 402 (described later) via the game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 (described later) (credit settlement is performed).

The pachislot machine 401 also includes a start switch 431, a return switch 432, a 1BET switch 433, a MAXBET switch 434, a stop switch board 435, a door opening/closing switch 436, and a game information display unit 437. , these are electrically connected to the main control section 411a via the door relay board 413. Note that these may be directly connected to the main control section 411a without going through the door relay board 413. Alternatively, it may be connected to the medal number control section 411b as long as the control is performed smoothly.

The start switch 431 has the same function as the start switch 7S described above. Further, the 1BET switch 433 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the above-described 1BET button 6b is pressed. Further, the MAXBET switch 434 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the above-mentioned MAX bet button 6a is pressed. Further, the stop switch board 435 has the same function as the above-described stop switch 8S. Further, the door opening/closing switch 436 has the same function as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 described above.

Here, the return switch 432 and the corresponding return button (not shown) are configured as a return operation detection unit (means) that can detect the return operation of the player, and when the corresponding return button is pressed by the return switch 432, When it is detected that the bet has been made, the number of medals bet is returned to the credit (bet settlement is performed). Note that the game information display unit 437 will be explained later with reference to FIG. 37.

Furthermore, the Pachislot machine 401 includes a medal number display unit 441, a medal lending display unit 442 including a medal lending operation board 442a, a lending switch 442b, and a return switch 442c, a game ball etc. connection terminal board 443, and a medal number clearing switch 444. These are electrically connected to the medal number control section 411b. Note that these may be connected to the medal number control section 411b via the door relay board 413. Alternatively, it may be connected to the main control section 411a as long as control is performed smoothly. Note that the medal number display unit 441 and the medal loan display unit 442 will be explained later with reference to FIG. 37.

The game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 has the same function as the external centralized terminal board 55 described above, and also has the same function as the communication device (connection terminal board) described above. Note that the game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 has connections for connecting the game media lending device 402 and the medal number control unit 411b, and for connecting the data display and other peripheral devices 403 and the medal lending operation board 442a. A mechanism section (not shown) is mounted, and the connection mechanism section 445a is provided with a connector (for example, a 25-pin connection connector) composed of a plurality of connection pins that is connected to the game media lending device 402 via a harness. It will be done.

The medal number clear switch 444 is a switch that can detect an initialization operation (for example, a press operation) when the administrator of the game parlor side clears (initializes) the number of medals credited in the pachislot machine 401. When the medal count clear switch 444 is pressed, a detection signal (medal count clear signal) is output to the medal count control section 411b. In this case, based on the medal number clear signal, the medal number control unit 411b changes the display of a 5-digit 7-segment LED for credit display (see FIG. 37B) provided in the medal number display unit 441 (described later) to "00000". ” (number of credits=0), the medal number display unit 441 is controlled. Note that an implementation example of the medal count clear switch 444 will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 401 has a display device 451, which is electrically connected to the sub-control board 412. Note that the display device 451 may be connected to the sub-control board 412 via the sub-relay board 414. Here, the display device 451 has the same functions as the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 described above.

Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 401 has a speaker group 452, an LED drive board 453, a production switch 454, and an operation switch 455, which are electrically connected to the sub-control board 412 via the sub-relay board 414. It is connected. Note that these may be directly connected to the sub control board 412 without going through the sub relay board 414.

The speaker group 452 has the same functions as the above-described speaker groups 35a, 35b, etc. Further, the LED drive board 453 is a board on which a drive circuit for each LED board 456 is mounted, and each LED board 456 has the same function as the above-mentioned lamp/LED group 23 and the like. Further, the production switch 454 and the operation switch 455 have the same functions as the production button groups 10a, 10b, etc. described above.

Next, a configuration example of the game information display unit 437 will be described with reference to FIG. 37A. The game information display unit 437 is configured to be able to display various types of game information, and its display operation is controlled by a main control microprocessor 470 (main control circuit), which will be described later, in the main control section 411a. Note that the game information display unit 437 can be provided at any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be provided at the base of the front door of the pachi-slot machine 1 (at or near the position where the medal slot 5 and the performance button 10a are provided in FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 37A, the game information display unit 437 is provided with a payout display section for displaying information on the number of payouts of game media (number of game values awarded). The payout display section is composed of a two-digit 7-segment LED ("payout display" in FIG. 37A) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

The game information display unit 437 also includes lamps for displaying the number of bets written as "START", "REPLAY", "1BET", "2BET", and "3BET" in FIG. 37A as lamps indicating game operation information. LEDs (hereinafter referred to as "line LEDs") are provided.

For example, when the number of bets (number of inputs) of gaming media is 0 (all line LEDs are off), when the 1 bet button 6b is pressed, the "1 BET" line LED lights up, and then the 1 bet When the button 6b is pressed, the line LEDs of "1BET" and "2BET" light up, and when the 1BET button 6b is pressed further, all the line LEDs of "1BET" to "3BET" light up. , the "START" line LED lights up. At this time, each time the 1-bet button 6b is pressed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the stored number of game media (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal number display unit 441, which will be described later.

Further, for example, when the MAX bet button 6a is pressed in a state where the number of bets (number of inputs) of gaming media is 0 (all line LEDs are off), all line LEDs from "1BET" to "3BET" lights up, and the "START" line LED lights up. At this time, with one bet operation, the value of the stored number of game media (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal number display unit 441 (described later) is subtracted by 3.

Further, for example, if the replay combination won in the previous game, the "START" and "REPLAY" line LEDs light up. At this time, the value of the stored number of game media (number of credits) displayed by the 5-digit 7-segment LED (described later) in the medal number display unit 441 (described later) is not subtracted.

Further, the game information display unit 437 is provided with an instruction display section for displaying information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information on the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, AT state). . The instruction display section is composed of a 3-digit 7-segment LED ("instruction display" in FIG. 37A) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. Note that, like the instruction monitor (notification lamp) described above, the instruction display section displays information that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified (for example, notifies the pressing order of "left → middle → right"). In some cases, "1" may be displayed), or the information on the stop operation to be notified may be directly displayed (for example, in the case of notifying the pressing order of "Left → Middle → Right", "1" may be displayed). 123).

Next, a configuration example of the medal number display unit 441 will be described with reference to FIG. 37B. The medal number display unit 441 is configured to be able to display information regarding the number of game media stored in the pachi-slot machine 401 (the number of game values held), and its display operation is controlled by the number of medals controller 411b. It is controlled by a microprocessor 480 (gaming value control circuit) for controlling the number of medals (described later). Note that the medal number display unit 441 can be provided at any position that can be easily recognized by the player. For example, it may be provided at the base of the front door of the pachi-slot machine 1 (at or near the position where the medal slot 5 and the performance button 10a are provided in FIG. 1). Further, the medal number display unit 441 has the same function as the above-mentioned possessed gaming value number display device.

As shown in FIG. 37B, the medal number display unit 441 is provided with a credit display section for displaying information on the number of game media stored (the number of game values held). The credit display section is composed of a 5-digit 7-segment LED ("credit display" in FIG. 37B) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. Note that, for example, if a similar credit display is performed in the game media lending device 402, the pachi-slot machine 401 may not be provided with a credit display section, or as in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1, a predetermined number of credits may be displayed. (For example, up to 50 credits) may be displayed.

Further, the medal number display unit 441 is provided with an error display section for displaying error information related to control of the number of medals (credit number) managed by the medal number control section 411b. The error display section is composed of a single-digit, 7-segment LED ("error display" in FIG. 37B) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. When an error related to the control of the number of medals (number of credits) managed by the number of medals control unit 411b occurs, the error code (letter or numbers, etc.) are displayed. Since the error display section serves as an error display means exclusively for the management control of the number of medals (gaming value), for example, errors related to the management control of the number of medals will not be confused with other errors, and errors related to the management control of the number of medals will not be confused with other errors. It becomes easier to recognize that this is occurring.

Here, examples of errors related to the control of the number of medals (number of credits) managed by the number of medals control unit 411b include an upper limit exceedance error. The upper limit exceedance error occurs when the upper limit value (for example, "16369") is set in the credit counter provided in the medal number control unit 411b for counting the number of stored game media, and the number of payouts is displayed on the credit counter. This is an error that occurs when it is determined that adding up will exceed the upper limit. Note that if an upper limit exceedance error occurs, it can be resolved (cancelled) by performing credit settlement.

Next, a configuration example of the medal lending display unit 442 will be described with reference to FIG. 37C. The medal lending display unit 442 displays information regarding the number of gaming media (game value) remaining on the gaming card (not shown) inserted into the gaming media lending device 402 (this is referred to as the "count"). The display operation is controlled by a medal number control microprocessor 480 (game value control circuit), which will be described later, in the medal number control section 411b. Note that the medal lending display unit 442 can be provided at any position as long as it is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be provided at the base of the front door of the pachi-slot machine 1 (at or near the position where the medal slot 5 and the performance button 10a are provided in FIG. 1). Further, the frequency may include the number of game media (gaming value) that can be lent out according to the amount of money input into the game media lending device 402.

As shown in FIG. 37C, the medal lending display unit 442 is provided with a frequency display section for displaying information on remaining degrees. The frequency display section is composed of a three-digit, 7-segment LED ("frequency display" in FIG. 37C) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

Further, the medal lending display unit 442 is provided with a lending lamp labeled "Rent" in FIG. 37C, which indicates information on whether the lending operation of game media is possible or not. The lending lamp lights up when the game media can be rented (before the lending operation), and turns off when the gaming media cannot be rented (during lending, paying for, returning, or when an abnormality occurs). Note that the rental lamp is configured to also function as a rental button that can be pressed down, and the pressing operation (that is, rental operation) is detected by the rental switch 442b.

Then, when the lending operation is detected, if the lending lamp is in a lit state (that is, if the lending operation is possible), a predetermined number of degrees is reached from the frequency managed by the game media lending device 402 side. The game media is added to the number of credits managed on the pachi-slot machine 401 side. Additionally, in accordance with this, the frequency display section displays the remaining frequency value after subtracting the frequency corresponding to the predetermined number of game media. In this example, the lending lamp is configured to also function as the lending button, but the lending button may be provided separately from the lending lamp, and the lending lamp may be configured to have only the display function. .

Further, the medal lending display unit 442 is provided with a return lamp labeled "return" in FIG. 37C, which indicates information on whether the return operation of the game medium is possible or not. The return lamp lights up when the game medium can be returned (before the return operation), and turns off when the game medium cannot be returned (during lending, paying for, returning, or when an abnormality is occurring). Note that the return lamp is configured to also function as a return button that can be pressed, and the pressing operation (that is, return operation) is detected by the return switch 442c.

Then, when the return operation is detected, if the return lamp is in a lit state (that is, if the return operation is possible), the number of credits and the number of bets managed on the pachislot machine 401 side are A gaming card that is added to the frequency managed on the media lending device 402 side and then stores the frequency (a mode in which the frequency itself is not stored in the gaming card, but information associated with it is stored) ) are discharged from the game media lending device 402. In addition, in this example, the return lamp is configured to function as a return button, but the return button may be provided separately from the return lamp, and the return lamp may be configured to have only a display function. .

In addition, in this example, dynamic lighting control is adopted as a control method for the various 7-segment LEDs provided in the game information display unit 437, the number of medals display unit 441, and the medal lending display unit 442, but this is different. A control method (for example, static lighting control) may be adopted.

[10-2. Configuration example of the main control unit and medal number control unit of the main control board according to another example]
Next, a configuration example of a main control section and a medal number control section of a main control board according to another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control board 411 and the main control board case, and FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control section 411a and medal number control section 411b of the main control board 411. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 of the main control board 411.

As described above, and as shown in FIG. 38, the main control board 411 is equipped with a main control section 411a, a medal number control section 411b, and a medal number clear switch 444. Note that details of the main control section 411a and the medal number control section 411b will be described later. For example, like the main control board 71 described above, the main control board 411 is housed in a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin board case (in this example, the main control board case 460) and is attached to the pachi-slot machine 401. installed inside.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main control board case 460 is sealed with various types of seals to prevent it from being opened easily or to make traces of the opening visible even if it is opened, from the perspective of fraud prevention and the like. It has a structure. That is, the main control board case 460 is basically configured to make it difficult to access the main control board 411 while ensuring visibility of the main control board 411.

Here, in this example, since the medal count clear switch 444 is mounted on the main control board 411, while ensuring such safety (that is, without the main control board case 460 being opened), It is necessary to enable access to the medal number clear switch 444 (operation of the medal number clear switch 444).

Therefore, in this example, in the main control board case 460, a small hole 461a is provided at a position corresponding to the location of the medal number clear switch 444 so that the medal number clear switch 444 can be pressed from the outside of the main control board case 460. is formed. More specifically, a recess 461b is formed at a position corresponding to the location of the medal number clear switch 444 of the main control board case 460, and a small hole 461a is formed approximately in the center of the recess 461b.

In order to prevent the medal count clear switch 444 from being easily operated by a person's finger, the size of the small hole 461a may be set to, for example, a diameter of about 2 mm or less. Then, the clerk at the game parlor may use, for example, a special device to press the button. As described above, the medal number clear switch 444 is a switch used by the game parlor administrator to clear (initialize) the number of medals credited in the pachislot machine 401, so it cannot be used in normal situations. This is a switch that is not used in the game, and is intended to be used when an unexpected situation occurs in the control of the number of medals (control related to payout, etc.) related to the management of the number of stored gaming media (number of credits). be. Therefore, even with this configuration, problems are unlikely to occur, and it is possible to prevent the medal number clear switch 444 from being pressed erroneously.

From this point of view, for example, the shape of the recess 461a may be made unique to match the shape of a dedicated instrument to further prevent erroneous operations. For example, if a protrusion or the like is provided in at least a part of the recess 461a, if it is a mere thin rod-shaped object, it will be obstructed and it will be difficult to access the medal number clear switch 444, but if it is a special device, it will be difficult to access the medal count clear switch 444. For example, it may be configured such that the medal count clear switch 444 can be accessed while avoiding this. Note that this is just an example, and such a unique shape is not limited to this.

Next, a configuration example of the main control section 411a will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The main control section 411a includes a main control microprocessor 470 (gaming control circuit), a clock pulse generation circuit 471, and a power management circuit 472. Note that details of the main control microprocessor 470 will be described later.

The clock pulse generation circuit 471 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, which will be described later, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the clock circuit 505 (EX), which will be described later, in the main control microprocessor 470. The main control microprocessor 470 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 472 manages fluctuations in the 12 V DC power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 415a (see FIG. 36), and supplies the main control microprocessor 470 with 5 V DC (VCC) power. Then, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage rises from 0V to a starting voltage value (10V)), the power management circuit 472 sends a reset signal to the reset signal in the main control microprocessor 470 (described later). When a power outage occurs (when the power supply voltage drops from 12V to the power outage voltage value (10.5V)), the power outage detection signal is output to the controller 506 (XSRST) and sent to the main control microprocessor 470. It is output to a parallel input port 511 (XINT), which will be described later. That is, the power management circuit 472 has means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the main control microprocessor 470 when the power is turned on, and a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the main control microprocessor 470 when the power is turned on, and a means (starting means) for outputting the reset signal (starting signal) to the main control microprocessor 470 when the power is turned on. It also serves as a means (power outage means) for outputting a detection signal (power outage signal).

Next, a configuration example of the medal number control section 411b will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The medal number control unit 411b includes a medal number control microprocessor 480 (gaming value control circuit), a clock pulse generation circuit 481, a power management circuit 482, and a role ratio monitor 483. Note that details of the medal number control microprocessor 480 will be described later.

Further, in FIG. 39, as is clear from the comparison between the main control section 411a and the medal number control section 411b, the medal number control section 411b has a configuration in which a role ratio monitor 483 is added to the main control section 411a. The configurations and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 481 and power management circuit 482 provided in the section 411b are the same as those of the clock pulse generation circuit 471 and the power management circuit 472 provided in the main control section 411a, respectively. . Therefore, a description of the configuration and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 481 and the power management circuit 482 will be omitted here.

In this example, the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 are dedicated microprocessors for gaming machines designed and manufactured by the same semiconductor manufacturer, and as described above, the clock pulse generation circuits (471, 481 ) and the power management circuit (472, 482) have the same configuration and function. Therefore, as in this example, when the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal count control microprocessor 480 are mounted on the same control board (main control board 411), the corresponding clock pulse generation circuit and Rather than providing individual power management circuits, one clock pulse generation circuit and one power management circuit may be shared by two microprocessors.

That is, the clock pulse generation circuit 471 and the clock pulse generation circuit 481 can be configured as one and the same clock pulse generation circuit. Further, the power management circuit 472 and the power management circuit 482 can be configured as one and the same power management circuit. Note that the clock pulse generation circuit can be shared but the power management circuits can be provided individually, or the power management circuit can be shared but the clock pulse generation circuits can be provided individually. .

The winning ratio monitor 483 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and has the same function as the winning ratio monitoring device 54 described above. In this example, the role ratio monitor 483 is provided in the main control board case 460, which is similar to the above-described role ratio monitor device 54, but it is mounted on the main control board 411 as a component of the medal number control section 411b. This differs from the winning ratio monitor device 54 described above in that the display contents (various ratio information) are controlled by a microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals. However, the main control unit 411a may be mounted on the main control board 411 as a component of the main control unit 411a, and its display contents (various ratio information) may be controlled by the main control microprocessor 470.

Further, the display contents (various ratio information) are controlled by the medal number control microprocessor 480 provided in the main control board case 460, but other boards (for example, percentage The display unit may be configured to be mounted on a display board), or such a display unit may be separately provided and connected to the medal number control unit 411b. Any mode can be adopted as long as the visibility of the role ratio monitor 483 can be ensured in a state where the main control board 411 is housed in the main control board case 460 and installed inside the pachi-slot machine 401. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a configuration example of the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 will be described. Both the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 are microprocessors with a security function for gaming machines, and in this example, the configuration of the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 are The configuration is the same as (of course, it may have a different configuration).

Therefore, herein, the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 will be simply referred to as "microprocessor MP". Note that the differences between the components having different functions between the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 will be explained as appropriate.

The microprocessor MP includes a CPU 501, a ROM 502, a RAM 503, an external bus interface 504 (signal bus 516 (local bus)), a clock circuit 505, a reset controller 506, an arithmetic circuit 507, a collation block 508, It has unique information 509, a random number circuit 510 (random number generation circuit), a parallel input port 511, an interrupt controller 512, a timer circuit 513, a serial communication circuit 514, and a parallel output port 515. The components of the microprocessor MP other than the signal bus 516 are connected to each other via the signal bus 516. Note that terminals D0 to D7 of IC1, which will be described later, and terminals D0 to D7 of IC2, which will be described later, are terminals for the external bus interface 504 (see FIG. 41, etc., which will be described later).

The CPU 501 executes various control programs and performs various controls based on clock pulses generated by the clock circuit 505. In the main control microprocessor 470, a CPU 501 (hereinafter also referred to as "main CPU") executes various control programs to control overall gaming operations. On the other hand, in the medal number control microprocessor 480, the CPU 501 (hereinafter also referred to as "medal number control CPU") executes various control programs and mainly controls the amount of gaming media (gaming value) at the time of payout and settlement. Performs control related to counting operations.

The ROM 502 stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501, various data tables, and the like. Note that the storage capacity of the ROM 502 is 12 kilobytes. The main control microprocessor 470 sends various control programs and data tables executed by the main CPU 501 to the ROM 502 (hereinafter also referred to as "main ROM"), and various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control board 412. Data etc. for doing so are stored. On the other hand, in the medal number control microprocessor 480, various control programs executed by the medal number control CPU 501 are stored in the ROM 502 (hereinafter also referred to as "medal number control ROM"), the main control section 411a and the game ball etc. connection terminal board 443. Various data and the like required for signal and data input/output operations performed with (gaming medium lending device 402, data display and other peripheral devices 403) are stored.

The RAM 503 is provided with various storage areas in which various data (parameters, flags, etc.) used when the CPU 501 executes various control programs are stored. Note that the storage capacity of the RAM 503 is 1 kilobyte. In the main control microprocessor 470, a storage area is provided in the RAM 503 (hereinafter also referred to as "main RAM") for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by execution of a control program. On the other hand, in the medal number control microprocessor 480, the RAM 503 (hereinafter also referred to as "medal number control RAM") stores various counters (e.g., medal counter, input counter, etc.) used when executing payout control, etc., various flags, etc. A storage area is provided for storing.

The external bus interface 504 is an interface circuit for electrically connecting the microprocessor MP to an external signal bus to which various components provided outside the microprocessor MP are connected. An example of the connection configuration of the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480 will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

The clock circuit 505 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), etc., and transmits the clock pulse signal input from the clock pulse generation circuits 471 and 481 to CPU operation and other components (for example, the timer circuit 513 ) into clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies used in Note that the clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies generated by the clock circuit 505 are sent to all circuits (CPU 501 to external bus interface 504 and reset controller 506 to parallel output port 515) except for the clock circuit 505 in the microprocessor MP. , is output at a frequency depending on the operation of each circuit.

The reset controller 506 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and WDT (watchdog timer) based on reset signals input from the power management circuits 472 and 482. Arithmetic circuit 507 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. When a testing device is connected, the verification block 508 verifies whether the connected testing device is genuine based on its signal level.

Unique information 509 stores unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor MP. The chip individual number of the microprocessor MP consists of 4 bytes of data, and is set when the chip is manufactured. Further, the chip individual number of the microprocessor MP is set to a different number for each chip.

Note that in the main control microprocessor 470, unique information (identification information) of the main control microprocessor 470 is stored in the unique information 509. Further, the ROM code of the main ROM 502, the chip individual number of the main control microprocessor 470, etc. are stored in the unique information 509. The ROM code of the main ROM 502 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, that is, 16 bytes of data. Each 4-byte data that constitutes the ROM code of the main ROM 502 is generated from the data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "2FBFh" of the built-in ROM (main ROM 502), and the 4-byte data is generated. The method also differs for each 4-byte data.

On the other hand, in the medal number control microprocessor 480, unique information (identification information) of the medal number control microprocessor 480 is stored in the unique information 509. Further, the ROM code of the medal number control ROM 502, the chip individual number of the medal number control microprocessor 480, etc. are stored in the unique information 509. The ROM code of the medal number control ROM 502 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, that is, 16 bytes of data. Note that each 4-byte piece of data constituting the ROM code of the medal number control ROM 502 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "0FBFh" of the built-in ROM (medal number control ROM 502). The method of generating byte data also differs for each 4-byte data.

Random number circuit 510 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The random number circuit 510 is composed of a plurality of random number registers, for example, random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining a 2-byte soft latch random number, and a 1-byte random number register 510 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number. It can be configured with random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining soft latch random numbers. In the main control microprocessor 470, the main CPU 501 extracts one value from among the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 510, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery.

The parallel input port 511 is an input port (memory map I/O) for signals input to the microprocessor MP from various circuits (for example, power management circuits 472, 482, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor MP. The parallel input port 511 is also connected to a random number circuit 510 and an interrupt controller 512. In addition, in the main control microprocessor 470, the start switch 431 is connected to the parallel input port 511, and at the timing when the start switch 431 is turned on (on edge), the predetermined random number register of the random number circuit 510 is input from the parallel input port 511. A latch signal is output to (for example, random number register 0). Then, in the random number circuit 510, a predetermined random number register is latched by inputting the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is obtained.

The interrupt controller 512 controls the CPU 501 based on a reset signal or a power failure detection signal inputted from the power management circuits 472 and 482 via the parallel input port 511, or a timeout signal inputted at a predetermined period from the timer circuit 513. Controls the execution timing of interrupt processing. Furthermore, when a reset signal or a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuits 472 or 482, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 513, the interrupt controller 512 indicates an interrupt processing start command. An interrupt request signal is output to the CPU 501. Then, the CPU 501 performs various interrupt processing based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 512.

Specifically, in the main control microprocessor 470, the interrupt controller 512 receives the reset signal, power failure detection signal, or timer circuit 513 input from the power management circuit 472 via the parallel input port 511 for 1.1172 msec. Based on the timeout signal that is input periodically, the execution timing of the interrupt process by the main CPU 501 (for example, in the case of a timeout signal, the periodic interrupt process shown in FIG. 32) is controlled. The main CPU 501 then performs various processes in the periodic interrupt process (for example, see FIG. 32) based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 512 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 513. Note that the main processing shown in FIG. 23 corresponds to the interrupt processing performed by the main CPU 501 based on the reset signal. That is, in all the processes executed by the main CPU 501, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 512 serves as the starting point for starting each process.

On the other hand, in the microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals, the interrupt controller 512 receives a reset signal or a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 482 via the parallel input port 511, or a power failure detection signal input from the timer circuit 513 at a cycle of 1 msec. The execution timing of the interrupt process by the medal number control CPU 501 is controlled based on the timeout signal. Then, as described above, the medal number control CPU 501 performs, for example, port input processing, game information It performs various processes such as reception processing, data transmission processing to the main control unit 411a, data transmission processing to peripheral devices, data reception processing from peripheral devices, and port output processing. That is, in all the processes executed by the medal number control CPU 501, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 512 serves as the starting point for starting each process.

The timer circuit 513 (PTC) operates on a clock pulse signal (a clock pulse signal with a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for CPU operation by a frequency divider (not shown)) generated by the clock circuit 505 count time). The timer circuit 513 then outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 512 at a predetermined period (a period of 1.1172 msec for the main control microprocessor 470, a period of 1 msec for the medal number control microprocessor 480).

The serial communication circuit 514 is a communication circuit that performs control when serially communicating various data between a control board on which the communication circuit is mounted and various boards provided outside the control board. Note that in the main control microprocessor 470, the serial communication circuit 514 transmits data (various Serial communication of control instructions (commands, various data, etc.). Further, the serial communication circuit 514 is composed of four communication circuits SCU0 to SCU3, only the communication circuit SCU0 is composed of a bidirectional serial communication circuit, and the communication circuits SCU1 to SCU3 are composed of serial communication circuits dedicated to transmission. For example, when connecting the main control board 411 (main control unit 411a) and the sub control board 412 by serial communication, the communication circuit SCU1, which is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used, and the main control unit 411a and the medal number control unit 411b by serial communication, a communication circuit SCU0, which is a bidirectional serial communication circuit, is used. Note that this is a method of using a serial communication circuit that has been established from the perspective of preventing fraud (prevention of fraud).

The parallel output port 515 is an output port (memory map I/O) for signals output from the microprocessor MP to various circuits provided outside the microprocessor MP. Note that in this example, data is output using, for example, a FIFO (First In First Out) method.

[10-3. Example of circuit configuration of main control board according to another example]
Next, a circuit configuration example of a main control board according to another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram of an example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 411, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an IC that can be mounted on the main control board 411, and FIGS. 46 and 47 are diagrams for explaining configuration examples of electronic components that cannot be used on the main control board 411, and FIGS. 49 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of dip components that can be mounted on the main control board 411.

A control board used in a gaming machine is generally configured as a printed circuit board (PCB), and the main control board 411 is configured as a printed circuit board in this example as well. For example, in the case of a double-sided printed circuit board, a copper-clad laminate with copper foil pasted on both sides of the board body (insulated board), which is constructed as an insulator, is made by processing glass fiber or resin to the required size. After cutting, form through holes and VIA holes so that electricity can be conducted, mask the copper foil in the areas that will remain as the necessary wiring pattern (circuit pattern), and remove the copper foil other than the masked areas to create the wiring pattern. The parts of the formed wiring pattern other than those that need to be exposed (such as parts that will be soldered later) are covered with an insulating solder resist made of ink or film material (protected by laminating insulating layers). It is manufactured through the following steps: Then, a plurality of necessary electronic components are mounted on the board manufactured in this way, and it becomes a control board that performs a specific function.

Here, electronic components mounted on such a control board include surface mount devices (SMD) whose terminals are soldered on the front side (single side) of the control board, and through-holes. A dip-mounted component (DIP) (hereinafter referred to as DIP) in which the terminal is inserted from the front side (one side) of the control board and the terminal is soldered on the back side (other side) (or both the front side and the back side). (sometimes simply referred to as "dip parts").

Compared to equivalent dip-mounted components, surface-mounted components are smaller in size and do not require through-holes for mounting, so they have the advantage of saving space on the mounting surface. . Additionally, in recent years, they have become more widespread than dip-mounted parts, so they have the advantage of being easier to obtain and cheaper than equivalent dip-mounted parts. On the other hand, because it is small, it is difficult to inspect it using a measuring instrument such as a digital oscilloscope, and it also has the disadvantage that the strength after mounting is inferior compared to equivalent dip-mounted parts.

On the other hand, dip-mounted components have the disadvantages of being difficult to secure space on the mounting surface compared to equivalent surface-mounted components, and are difficult to obtain and expensive, but on the other hand, they are easier to handle compared to equivalent surface-mounted components. In addition to being able to perform the above-mentioned inspections easily, it also has the advantage of being stronger after mounting.

Therefore, in this example, certain conditions are determined after considering such advantages and disadvantages, and if the conditions are met, surface mount components are adopted as the target electronic components and mounted on the main control board 411. , if the requirements are not satisfied, the configuration is such that a dip-mounted component is used as the target electronic component and mounted on the main control board 411. In this section, an example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 411 will be explained focusing on this point.

(Outline of circuit configuration example of main control board 411)
First, an example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 411 will be outlined with reference to FIG. 41. Note that FIG. 41 schematically shows an example of a specific location (connection path between the main control microprocessor 470 and the medal number control microprocessor 480) extracted from the main control board 411. Not all circuit configurations on the main control board 411 are shown. In other words, if the conditions described below are met, surface mount components may be used in locations other than those shown in FIG. 41, and test patterns (for example, test points 411k described below) may be provided in connection paths between these surface mount components. is possible.

In FIG. 41, IC1 indicates the main control microprocessor 470 (see FIG. 40), and IC2 indicates the medal number control microprocessor 480 (see FIG. 40). Further, IC3 to IC6 are, for example, 20-pin ICs configured as buffer ICs, and are surface-mounted components. Note that an example of the configuration of IC3 to IC6 will be described later with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, IC1 and IC3 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC3. That is, IC3 is electrically connected to external bus interface 504 of main control microprocessor 470. Furthermore, IC1 and IC4 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC4. That is, IC4 is electrically connected to external bus interface 504 of main control microprocessor 470. This allows data to be output from the IC3 or IC4 to the main control microprocessor 470.

Note that by configuring the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC3 and IC4 as, for example, D0 to D7 terminals (data bus), data can be exchanged between the main control microprocessor 470 and IC3 or IC4. It may be configured to allow input/output. Alternatively, the main control microprocessor 470 may be configured to be able to output data to the IC3 or IC4.

Here, the "data bus" is a signal bus that handles data (for data transfer). That is, "data bus" means a signal bus in which the type of signal handled is "data." Although not used in this embodiment, there is also a signal bus called an "address bus" that handles addresses (for specifying addresses). In other words, "address bus" means a signal bus in which the type of signal handled is "address." On the other hand, a "local bus", as the word "local" indicates, refers to a signal bus that has a relatively slow transfer speed among signal buses. Therefore, for example, a signal bus labeled "data bus" may correspond to a "local bus," and a signal bus labeled "local bus" may correspond to a "data bus." does not create any contradiction.

Further, in IC1 and IC3, the XCS0 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1/G2 terminals (gate input) of IC3 are connected by a signal line. Moreover, IC1 and IC4 are connected by a signal line between the XCS1 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1/G2 terminals (gate input) of IC4. Thereby, on the IC1 side, it is possible to switch whether data is output from IC3 or IC4. Note that the XCS0 terminal and the XCS1 terminal are output terminals from the parallel output port 515 (see FIG. 40).

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, IC2 and IC5 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5. That is, the IC 5 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals. Further, IC2 and IC6 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC6. That is, the IC 6 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals. This allows input/output of data between the microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals and the IC5 or IC6 (or data output from the microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals to the IC5 or IC6). .

By configuring the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5 and IC6 as, for example, Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output), it is possible to output data from IC5 or IC6 to the microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals. It may be configured so that

Further, the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of the IC2 are connected to the input terminal (which may be an input/output terminal, not shown) of the role ratio monitor 483 by an external signal bus. That is, the role ratio monitor 483 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 504 of the microprocessor 480 for controlling the number of medals.

Moreover, IC2 and IC5 are connected by a signal line between the XCS2 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC5. Further, in IC2 and IC6, the XCS3 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC6 are connected by a signal line. This allows the IC2 side to switch whether to output data to IC5 or IC6. Note that the XCS2 terminal and the XCS3 terminal are output terminals from the parallel output port 515 (see FIG. 40).

Furthermore, IC3 and IC5 are connected by signal lines between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5. This allows data to be output from IC5 to IC3. That is, data output from IC2 is configured to be output to IC1 via IC5 (input→output) and IC3 (input→output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are configured to be electrically connected in such a manner that IC3 and IC5 are mounted on their connection paths.

Furthermore, IC4 and IC6 are connected by signal lines between A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6. This allows data to be output from IC6 to IC4. That is, data output from IC2 is configured to be output to IC1 via IC6 (input→output) and IC4 (input→output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are configured to be electrically connected in such a manner that IC4 and IC6 are mounted on their connection paths.

Note that these are just examples, and the connection mode between IC1 and IC2 is not limited to the above-described one. For example, in a connection path where IC3 and IC5 are swapped and IC3 and IC5 are installed between IC1 and IC2, the data output from IC1 will be transferred to IC5 (input → output) and IC3 (input → output). The configuration may be such that the signal is output to the IC 2 via the IC 2. Also, for example, in a connection path where IC4 and IC6 are swapped and IC4 and IC6 are installed between IC1 and IC2, the data output from IC1 will be transferred to IC6 (input → output) and IC4 (input → output). It may also be configured so that it is output to the IC 2 via the output (output).

Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) and A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 are all input/output terminals (for example, data bus), and IC1/ The connection path between IC2 and IC3 and IC5 may be configured so that data can be input and output to each other. Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) and A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 are all input/output terminals (for example, data bus), and IC1/ The connection path between the IC2 and the IC4 and the IC6 may be configured so that data can be input and output to each other.

Although the symbols are omitted in FIG. 41, the connection paths between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 are connected to the respective signal lines. Eight test points (TP1 to TP8, which will be described later) are provided. In addition, the connection path between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 includes eight test points (TP9 to TP16 described later) connected to each signal line. ) is provided. This will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

(Example of IC configuration that can be used as IC3 to IC6)
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a configuration example of ICs that can be used as IC3 to IC6 will be described. As described above, IC3 to IC6 are all 20-pin ICs (having 20 terminals), and are electronic components configured as surface-mounted components. Note that the IC shown in FIG. 42 is just an example, and the IC that can be used in this example is not limited to this. For example, the number of pins (number of terminals) may be less than 20 pins (for example, a 10-pin IC) or more than 20 pins (for example, a 64-pin IC). good. The same applies to other shapes (the shape of the main body and the position where the pin is provided).

Furthermore, in this example, the surface of the main control board 411 on which surface mount components are mounted (that is, the surface of the main control board 411 that is easily visible from the outside when it is housed in the main control board case 460 and installed inside the pachi-slot machine 401 (front side) is the component mounting surface, and the surface on which surface mount components are not mounted (i.e., the back side that is difficult to see from the outside when it is housed in the main control board case 460 and installed inside the Pachislot machine 401) ) is sometimes explained as a non-component mounting surface.

As shown in FIG. 42, the IC of this example has a rectangular main body and foot-shaped terminals that are provided to protrude from the rectangular main body and are soldered to the solder surface (pad) on the main control board 411 when mounted. and has. Ten terminals are provided on one side of the main body (lower side in the top view of FIG. 42), and ten terminals are provided on the opposite side (upper side in the top view of FIG. 42). In addition, in such an IC, in order to define the role of each terminal and make it easy to understand, it is common that a terminal number is defined for each terminal, and the IC of this example also has a terminal number defined as shown in FIG. 42. The lower terminals in the top view are defined as terminals numbered 1 to 10 from the lower left to the lower right, and the upper terminals in the top view are defined as terminals 11 to 20 from the upper right to the upper left. is defined as the terminal of

In IC3 to IC6, for example, the 10th terminal is set to be used as a GND terminal, and the 20th terminal is set to be used as a Vcc terminal. Further, the remaining terminals are each set to be used as one of the above-mentioned terminals.

Furthermore, IC3 to IC6 can use any of the specifications (Type 1 to Type 3) shown in the size table in Figure 42, but for example, for IC3 and IC4, Type 2 with a terminal pitch of 0.65 mm can be used. As for IC5 and IC6, Type 3 with a terminal pitch of 0.65 mm is used.

In the size chart of Figure 42, "D" represents the length in the longitudinal direction of the IC body, "E1" represents the length in the lateral direction of the IC body, and "E2" represents the length in the lateral direction of the IC body. , represents the overall length of the IC, taking into account the length of the terminals. Moreover, "P" represents the length from the center of one terminal to the center of another adjacent terminal (between terminals). This is called "terminal pitch" and also "terminal pitch". Moreover, "B" represents the length of one terminal in the transverse direction.

Here, in this example, surface mount components are installed on the main control board 411 from the viewpoint of ensuring the fairness and reliability of the game by ensuring that inspection using a measuring instrument such as a digital oscilloscope can be performed appropriately. When implementing it, the following conditions (constraints) are established.

(1) All surface mount components must have a surface area exceeding a predetermined size. In short, this condition is based on the fact that if a surface mount component that is too small is mounted, it will not be possible to properly inspect it using a measuring instrument, and it will be difficult to detect defects or fraudulent activities. is stipulated not to be used.

In this example, the "predetermined size" is determined to be, for example, "6 square mm (6 mm2)". However, this is just an example, and a larger size (for example, 8 square mm (8 mm2)) may be specified, or a smaller size (for example, 4 square mm (4 mm2)). may be determined. In other words, this is simply a set of sizes that are currently considered suitable, depending on the background circumstances of the gaming machine field and the specifications of the measuring instruments used (for example, the size of the probe of a digital oscilloscope). It can be changed as appropriate according to changes in factors.

Note that the IC of this example satisfies this condition because the surface area of any of the specifications (Type 1 to Type 3) shown in the size table of FIG. 42 exceeds 6 mm2 (6 mm2). ing.

(2) If the terminal pitch of each surface mount component connected by wiring is less than a certain size, a test pattern (for example, a test point described below) connected to the wiring is provided. This condition basically means that the terminals of surface mount components or the distance between the terminals become thinner than a certain condition (in other words, the probe of the measuring instrument cannot access the terminals themselves or the wiring patterns between surface mount components). This law stipulates that it is necessary to permit the use of such surface-mounted components and to provide testable locations that can be inspected as an alternative.

In this example, the "specific size" is determined to be, for example, "1.27 mm." However, this is just an example, and a larger size (for example, "1.64 mm") or a smaller size (for example, "0.65 mm") may be determined. In other words, this is simply a set of sizes that are currently considered suitable, depending on the background circumstances of the gaming machine field and the specifications of the measuring instruments used (for example, the size of the probe of a digital oscilloscope). It can be changed as appropriate according to changes in factors.

Note that the IC of this example has a terminal pitch of "1.27 mm" or less for all specifications (Type 1 to Type 3) shown in the size table of FIG. 42, so each wiring A test point connected to the This will be discussed later.

(3) If the dip-mounted component is not connected in the wiring between the terminal of one surface-mounted component and the terminal of another surface-mounted component, the test pattern connected to that wiring (for example, test points). In short, this condition is not necessary if inspection is possible by accessing the terminals of dip-mounted components under the same assumption as in condition (2) above, but if there is a location that can be inspected in this way, This stipulates that if there is no inspection available, it is necessary to provide an inspection location that can be inspected as an alternative.

Although details will be described later, in this example, no dip-mounted components are connected to any of the wiring connecting IC3 and IC5, and no dip-mounted components are connected to any of the wiring connecting IC4 and IC6. Dip-mounted components are not connected. Therefore, in order to satisfy this condition, test points connected to each wiring are provided. This will be discussed later.

Note that the conditions (1) to (3) above are only examples that are determined to be suitable from the above-mentioned viewpoint. Therefore, in addition to the conditions (1) to (3) above, it is possible to further stipulate conditions different from these, or it is possible to not stipulate any of the conditions (1) to (3) above. It is also possible to do so. Furthermore, when connecting surface-mounted components, it is also possible to provide test points without any conditions. Furthermore, when both conditions (2) and (3) are employed, they may be an AND relationship or an OR relationship.

For example, even if the terminal pitch of each surface mount component connected by wiring is below a certain size, there is no need to provide a test pattern if a dip mount component is connected to the wiring, or Even if dip mount components are not connected in the wiring between the terminals of one surface mount component and the terminals of another surface mount component, the terminal pitch of each of those surface mount components is within a specific size. If it exceeds the limit, it can be determined that there is no need to provide a test pattern.

Also, for example, if the terminal pitch of each surface mount component connected by wiring is less than a certain size, it is necessary to provide a test pattern even if a dip mount component is connected to the wiring. Alternatively, if dip mount components are not connected in the wiring between the terminals of one surface mount component and the terminals of another surface mount component, the terminal pitch of each of those surface mount components may be set to a specific size. It can be determined that it is necessary to provide a test pattern even if it exceeds the limit.

(Example of configuration of circuit pattern of main control board 411)
Next, a configuration example of the circuit pattern of the main control board 411 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. Note that FIGS. 43 and 44 are diagrams showing an example of the circuit pattern of the portion surrounded by dotted lines in FIG. 41, and are diagrams for explaining each component, and FIG. TP) is a diagram for explaining.

In FIGS. 43 and 44, the white areas bordered by lines represent insulated wiring patterns and ground patterns, and the narrower one is 411c (wiring pattern 1), and the wider one is 411d. (Wiring pattern 2). Note that in FIG. 43, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, only some parts are labeled with reference numerals, but regions similarly represented are basically the same constituent parts. This point also applies to each component described below. The width of 411c (wiring pattern 1) is, for example, 0.20 mm, and the width of 411d (wiring pattern 1) is, for example, 0.60 mm (see the size table in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessary that the width be the same at all locations.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, the white areas bordered by circular thin lines represent VIA holes, with the smaller diameter being 411e (VIA hole 1) and the larger diameter being 411f (VIA hole 1). 2). 411e (VIA hole 1) has, for example, an outer diameter of 0.60 mm and an inner diameter of 0.30 mm (see the size table in FIG. 44). Further, 411f (VIA hole 2) has, for example, an outer diameter of 0.80 mm and an inner diameter of 0.50 mm (see the size table in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessary that the diameter be the same at all locations.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, a white area surrounded by a circular thick line represents a through hole, and this is designated as 411g (through hole). 411g (through hole) has, for example, an outer diameter of 1.40 mm and an inner diameter of 0.80 mm (see the size table in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessary to have the same diameter at all locations, and the outer and inner diameters can be set to match the thickness of the lead wire of the electronic component (dip-mounted component) to be mounted.

Note that a pair of upper and lower through holes located to the left of each of the locations where IC3 to IC6 are mounted (see Figure 44) are equipped with capacitors as dip-mounted components (described later) whose terminals are also formed by a pair of lead wires. (see FIG. 48) is implemented.

Here, the VIA hole and the through hole are both a through hole that penetrates between the front and back surfaces of the board, and are common components in that the inside is plated and configured to allow electricity to flow. These may be collectively referred to as "via holes" or simply "vias", and may also be collectively referred to as "through holes". However, in this example, in order to distinguish between these and make the explanation easier to understand, a VIA hole (via hole) means a simple through-hole that can conduct electricity without mounting a dip-mounted component, and a through-hole means a through-hole that can conduct electricity without mounting a dip-mounted component. This term refers to a through-hole through which electricity can be supplied, which is soldered when a component is mounted (that is, a dip-mounted component is mounted).

However, even VIA holes may be soldered when electronic components are mounted. In this case, solder is inserted into the VIA hole so that all the through holes are filled with solder. However, if the VIA hole is to be kept as a through hole, the solder Mask processing is performed to prevent solder from being inserted inside.

Note that even the portion described as a VIA hole in this example can be configured as a through hole if a dip-mounted component is mounted, and the portion described as a through hole in this example can be configured as a through hole. However, if it is a place where dip-mounted components are not necessarily mounted, it can be configured as a VIA hole. That is, in the present invention, even if it is written as "via hole" or "via", as long as it does not contradict the purpose of the invention, this includes the through hole referred to in this embodiment, and the present invention For example, even if it is written as a "through hole", the VIA hole referred to in this embodiment is included in this as long as it does not contradict the purpose of the invention.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, the diagonally shaded area downward to the right represents a power pattern for supplying 5V power, and is designated as 411h (+5V power pattern). In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, the gray area represents a GND plane as a so-called solid GND, and is referred to as 411i (GND plane).

In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, a black rectangular area represents a solder surface (pad) to which a terminal of a surface mount component is soldered, and is referred to as 411j (solder surface (pad)). 411j (soldering surface (pad)) is, for example, a place where IC3 and IC4 are mounted (as shown in FIG. 44, a place where 20 terminals of IC3 are soldered, and a place where 20 terminals of IC4 are soldered). For example, the width in the short direction (IC3/4 pad short) is 0.30 mm, the longitudinal width (IC3/4 pad length) is 1.00 mm, and the solder The distance between the surface and the solder surface (between IC3 and IC4 pads) is 0.40 mm (see size table in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessary to have the same size and spacing at all locations.

In addition, 411j (soldering surface (pad)) is, for example, a location where IC5 and IC6 are mounted (as shown in FIG. 44, a location where 20 terminals of IC5 are soldered, and a location where 20 terminals of IC6 are soldered). For example, the width in the short direction (IC5/6 pad short) is 0.40 mm, and the longitudinal width (IC5/6 pad length) is 1.20 mm. , the distance between the solder surfaces (between IC5 and IC6 pads) is 0.25 mm (see the size table in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessary to have the same size and spacing at all locations. Note that, as described above, the terminal pitch of IC3 to IC6 (between IC3 to IC6 pins) is, for example, 0.65 mm.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, a black circular area represents a test point configured to be accessible by, for example, a probe of a digital oscilloscope, and is referred to as 411k (test point (TP)). 411k (TP) has a diameter of 1.00 mm, for example (see the size table in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessary that the diameter be the same at all locations. Further, the diameter of the test point (TP) is just an example, and may be larger or smaller than that. That is, a suitable diameter can be appropriately selected as long as inspection using a measuring instrument can be performed and space can be secured on the main control board 411. Further, the test point (TP) does not necessarily have to be circular. For example, it may have a rectangular shape similar to 411j (soldering surface (pad)) or another polygonal shape. Alternatively, it may have an irregular shape.

In addition, for example, it is possible to set different shapes for each test point (TP) (or between at least some test points (TP) and other test points (TP)) without checking the wiring pattern. The configuration may be such that it can be easily recognized whether the wiring is being inspected. In any case, identification information indicating the type of test point (TP) (for example, "TP1" to "TP16") is written on the insulating layer on the surface near each test point (TP). Information) may be printed so that it can be easily recognized which wiring is being inspected.

Although not shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, in this example, a test point (TP) is provided on the component mounting surface shown in FIGS. The surface is configured so that no test points (TP) are provided thereon. This means that even if the main control board case 460 is open and the component mounting surface of the main control board 411 is accessible, the back side (non-component mounting surface) of the main control board 411 is still in the main control board case. This is because the test point (TP) is often fixed at 460, and even if a test point (TP) is provided here, a quick test cannot be performed. From this point of view, for example, surface mount components should not be mounted on the non-component surface (in the field of gaming machines, electronic components should not be mounted on both sides of the main control board (main board) of the gaming machine). (Electronic components are required to be mounted on one side), surface mount components should be mounted only on the component mounting side, and inspection using test points (TP) should be performed on the non-component mounting side. It may be configured so that it is not necessary.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, a plain and white surface other than the above-mentioned region represents a surface without an insulated wiring pattern and a ground pattern, and is designated as 411l.

Here, the test point (TP) provided on the main control board 411, which is one of the characteristic parts of the main control board 411 in this example, will be explained with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 45, the test point (TP) portion of the circuit pattern of the main control board 411 partially shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 is further enlarged.

TP1 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the second terminal of IC3 and the second terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A1 terminal of IC3 and the Q0 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Although TP1 is provided by extending the wiring on the second terminal side of IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the second terminal of IC3 and the second terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring, or the second terminal of IC5 may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the second terminal of IC3 and the second terminal of IC5.

TP2 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the 3rd terminal of IC3 and the 5th terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A2 terminal of IC3 and the Q1 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. It is assumed that TP2 is provided by extending the wiring on the third terminal side of IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 3 terminal of IC3 and the No. 5 terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 3 terminal of IC3 and the No. 5 terminal of IC5.

TP3 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 4 terminal of IC3 and the No. 6 terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A3 terminal of IC3 and the Q2 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that although the TP3 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 4 terminal of the IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 4 terminal of IC3 and the No. 6 terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 4 terminal of IC3 and the No. 6 terminal of IC5.

TP4 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 5 terminal of IC3 and the No. 9 terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A4 terminal of IC3 and the Q3 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that although the TP4 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 5 terminal of the IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 5 terminal of IC3 and the No. 9 terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 5 terminal of IC3 and the No. 9 terminal of IC5.

TP5 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 6 terminal of IC3 and the No. 12 terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A5 terminal of IC3 and the Q4 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. It is assumed that the TP5 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 6 terminal of the IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the 6th terminal of IC3 and the 12th terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the 12th terminal of IC5. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 6 terminal of IC3 and the No. 12 terminal of IC5.

TP6 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 7 terminal of IC3 and the No. 15 terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A6 terminal of IC3 and the Q5 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that the TP6 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 7 terminal of the IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 7 terminal of IC3 and the No. 15 terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 7 terminal of IC3 and the No. 15 terminal of IC5.

TP7 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 8 terminal of IC3 and the No. 16 terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A7 terminal of IC3 and the Q6 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that the TP7 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 8 terminal of the IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 8 terminal of IC3 and the No. 16 terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 8 terminal of IC3 and the No. 16 terminal of IC5.

TP8 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 9 terminal of IC3 and the No. 19 terminal of IC5, and for example, the energization state between the A8 terminal of IC3 and the Q7 terminal of IC5 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that although the TP8 is provided by extending the wiring on the 9th terminal side of the IC3 and being connected to the extended wiring, its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the 9th terminal of IC3 and the 19th terminal of IC5 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the 19th terminal of IC5. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 9 terminal of IC3 and the No. 19 terminal of IC5.

TP9 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the second terminal of IC4 and the second terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A1 terminal of IC4 and the Q0 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that the TP9 is provided by extending the wiring on the second terminal side of the IC4 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the second terminal of IC4 and the second terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring, or the second terminal of IC6 may be connected to the second terminal of IC6. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the second terminal of IC4 and the second terminal of IC6.

TP10 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the 3rd terminal of IC4 and the 5th terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A2 terminal of IC4 and the Q1 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Although the TP 10 is provided by extending the wiring on the third terminal side of the IC 4 and being connected to the extended wiring, its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 3 terminal of IC4 and the No. 5 terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 3 terminal of the IC4 and the No. 5 terminal of the IC6.

TP11 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 4 terminal of IC4 and the No. 6 terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A3 terminal of IC4 and the Q2 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that the TP 11 is provided by extending the wiring on the No. 4 terminal side of the IC 4 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 4 terminal of IC4 and the No. 6 terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 4 terminal of the IC4 and the No. 6 terminal of the IC6.

TP12 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 5 terminal of IC4 and the No. 9 terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A4 terminal of IC4 and the Q3 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that the TP 12 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 5 terminal of the IC 4 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 5 terminal of IC4 and the No. 9 terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 5 terminal of the IC4 and the No. 9 terminal of the IC6.

TP13 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 6 terminal of IC4 and the No. 12 terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A5 terminal of IC4 and the Q4 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Although the TP 13 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 6 terminal of the IC 4 and being connected to the extended wiring, its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 6 terminal of IC4 and the No. 12 terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 6 terminal of the IC4 and the No. 12 terminal of the IC6.

TP14 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 7 terminal of IC4 and the No. 15 terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A6 terminal of IC4 and the Q5 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that the TP 14 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 7 terminal of the IC 4 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 7 terminal of IC4 and the No. 15 terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 7 terminal of the IC4 and the No. 15 terminal of the IC6.

TP15 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the No. 8 terminal of IC4 and the No. 16 terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A7 terminal of IC4 and the Q6 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that although the TP 15 is provided by extending the wiring on the side of the No. 8 terminal of the IC 4 and being connected to the extended wiring, its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the No. 8 terminal of IC4 and the No. 16 terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the branched wiring. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the No. 8 terminal of the IC4 and the No. 16 terminal of the IC6.

TP16 is a test point connected to the wiring that connects the 9th terminal of IC4 and the 19th terminal of IC6, and for example, the energization state between the A8 terminal of IC4 and the Q7 terminal of IC6 in FIG. It is a test point configured to be able to measure. Note that the TP 16 is provided by extending the wiring on the 9th terminal side of the IC 4 and being connected to the extended wiring, but its arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the wiring connecting the 9th terminal of IC4 and the 19th terminal of IC6 may be branched between them, and the wiring may be connected to the 19th terminal of IC6. The wiring on the number terminal side may be extended and connected to the extended wiring. That is, it may be provided at any location as long as it can grasp the same energization status as the wiring between the 9th terminal of the IC4 and the 19th terminal of the IC6.

In this example, a test point (TP) is provided on the main control board 411 to enable inspection using a measuring instrument such as a digital oscilloscope. The configuration (configuration of the test pattern) is not limited to this. For example, a test pin (contact pin) may be mounted in a through hole connected to a wiring to be tested (provided at a location where the same current status as that of the wiring can be grasped). In this way, for example, when the probe of the digital oscilloscope is a clip type, the accessibility is improved compared to the case where test points are provided, so that the ease and convenience of inspection can be improved. That is, in this example, the portions described as having test points (TPs) may be configured so that test pins are mounted on some or all of them. Furthermore, the test points and test pins are only examples of configurations that enable such testing, and various configurations can be adopted as long as appropriate testing is possible.

(Example of configuration of electronic components that cannot be used on main control board 411)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, a configuration example of electronic components (surface-mounted components) that cannot be used on the main control board 411 will be described. FIG. 46 shows a configuration example of a chip resistor, which is an example of such an electronic component, and FIG. 47 shows a configuration example of a chip capacitor, which is an example of such an electronic component.

A chip resistor (chip resistor) as shown in Figure 46 is an electronic component used to control the current of connected wiring. It has a resistance part (including the exterior) made of a suitable metal, and an electrode part that is connected (soldered) to the wiring after being mounted.

Furthermore, as shown in the size table of FIG. 46, chip resistors are available in various specifications (for example, Type 1 to Type 9). Here, focusing on the size, for example, Type 1 to Type 6 have a surface area (the product of the length L in the longitudinal direction and the length W in the transverse direction in FIG. 46) of 6 square mm. (6mm2). In other words, it is a surface mount component that does not satisfy the above-mentioned condition (1). Therefore, in this example, according to the condition (1) above, these chip resistors cannot be used.

For example, Type 7 to Type 9 chip resistors have a surface area exceeding 6 square mm (6 mm2), so these chip resistors can be used according to the condition (1) above. Become. However, it may be decided that such chip resistors as surface mount components cannot be used regardless of their size (in this case, the use of chip resistors as dip components as shown in FIG. 48, which will be described later) may be prohibited. ).

In addition, a chip capacitor (capacitor) as shown in Figure 47 is also an electronic component used to control the current of connected wiring. ) or a dielectric part (as an electrolytic capacitor) made of an aluminum material, etc., and an electrode part, etc., which is connected to wiring (soldered) after being mounted.

Further, chip capacitors also come in various specifications (for example, Type 1 to Type 5), as shown in the size table of FIG. 47, for example. Here, focusing on the size, for example, Type 1 to Type 4 have a surface area (the product of the length L in the longitudinal direction and the length W in the transverse direction in FIG. 47) of 6 square mm. (6mm2). In other words, it is a surface mount component that does not satisfy the above-mentioned condition (1). Therefore, in this example, according to the condition (1) above, these chip capacitors cannot be used.

Note that, for example, since the surface area of a Type 5 capacitor exceeds 6 square mm (6 mm2), this chip capacitor can be used in accordance with the above-mentioned condition (1). However, it may be decided that such chip capacitors as surface mount components cannot be used regardless of their size (in this case, capacitors as dip components as shown in Figure 49 described later) may be prohibited. ).

(Example of configuration of dip components that can be mounted on main control board 411)
Next, a configuration example of a dip component that can be mounted on the main control board 411 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 shows an example of the configuration of a resistor, which is an example of such a dip component, and FIG. 49 shows an example of the configuration of a capacitor, which is an example of such a dip component.

A resistor (resistor) as shown in FIG. 48 includes, for example, a cylindrical resistance part (a base part made of a ceramic material or the like, a resistor made of a suitable metal depending on the resistance value, and (including an exterior, etc.), and a pair of lead wires (terminals) protruding from both ends of the resistance section. As shown in FIG. 48, when the pair of lead wires is mounted on the component mounting surface, they are bent and inserted through the opening of the through hole on the component mounting surface. A portion of the lead wire inside and near the through hole is soldered. Further, in such a dip component, the energization status can be measured by, for example, bringing the tip of a probe of a digital oscilloscope into contact with a lead wire. This also applies to capacitors described below.

Further, resistors as dip components have various specifications (for example, Type 1 to Type 4), as shown in the size table of FIG. 48, for example. In addition, in these, the respective dimensions before the bending process (see "Before processing" in FIG. 48) and after the bending process (see "After processing" in FIG. 48) are shown in the size table of FIG. 48, for example. That's right. Further, in these cases, for example, it is also possible to perform bending processing in another manner (see "Another example after processing" in FIG. 48). In addition, if it is necessary to extend the lead wire when bending in another mode, it is also possible to extend the lead wire as appropriate.

In addition, in such a resistor, a plurality of colorable band areas (see ``1'' to ``4'' in ``After processing'' in Figure 48) are provided in the resistance part, and it is possible to color them in any color. It is configured so that the resistance value and tolerance of the resistor can be visually recognized depending on the color code of the resistor. Here, the "1" area indicates the first digit (the tens's digit), the "2" area indicates the second digit (the ones' digit), and the area "3" indicates the magnification (multiplier). ), and the area of "4" indicates the tolerance. For example, if the color code is "brown (1)", "black (0)", "orange (1000)", and "gold (±5%)" from the left, the resistance value and tolerance of the resistor are " 10 kΩ (±5%).

A capacitor as shown in Fig. 49 has a dielectric part made of laminated ceramic materials, internal electrodes, etc. (as a ceramic capacitor) or aluminum material (as an electrolytic capacitor); It has a pair of lead wires (terminals) etc. protruding from one end. When a pair of lead wires are mounted on the component mounting surface, they are inserted through the opening of the through hole on the component mounting surface, and the parts of the lead wires in and near the through hole are soldered on the component mounting surface and the non-component mounting surface. be done.

The capacitors shown in FIG. 49 include a ceramic capacitor whose lead wires are taped in an outside crimp shape ("outside crimp" in FIG. 49) and a ceramic capacitor whose lead wires are taped in an inside crimp shape ("outside crimp" in FIG. 49). This is an example of "inside crimp"). Note that, in general, an outside crimp shape has a larger capacitance than an inside crimp shape. Further, although not shown, other capacitors such as electrolytic capacitors and film capacitors can be mounted as dip components on the main control board 411.

Furthermore, capacitors as dip components come in various specifications (for example, Type 1 to Type 6 for outside crimp and Type 1 to Type 5 for inside crimp), as shown in the size table in Figure 49. . The dimensions of each of these are, for example, as shown in the size table of FIG. 49. For example, the capacitor mounted in FIG. If it is an inside crimp, then Type 5 or Type 6 is selected, and if it is an inside crimp, one of Types 1 to 5 is selected.

[10-4. Example of mounting board management information on the main control board according to another example]
Next, an example of mounting board management information on a main control board according to another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 59. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining an example of mounting board management information on the main control board of a conventional gaming machine, and FIGS. 51 and 52 illustrate a first example of mounting board management information on the main control board 411. FIGS. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining a second example of mounting board management information on the main control board 411, and FIGS. 55 and 56 are diagrams for explaining mounting example 2 of board management information on the main control board 411. 57 and 58 are diagrams for explaining mounting example 4 of board management information on the main control board 411, and FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining mounting example 3 of board management information on the main control board 411. 5 is a diagram for explaining an example of printing on a film 543. FIG.

Conventionally, the main control board (also called the "main board") used in gaming machines is often sealed in a transparent board case (also called the "main board case") from the perspective of preventing fraud. It has been demanded. In addition, the board case is required to leave traces when it is opened (for example, rules regarding certification and model verification of gaming machines: Attached Table 3 (1) A (C)). reference).

Also, from the same perspective, (a) the name of the manufacturer or importer of the gaming machine, and (b) the number, symbol, or other code for identifying the model of the main board, on the board of the main control board. It is required to be printed on the same page and displayed in a way that makes it easy to identify (for example, rules regarding certification of gaming machines and type examination, etc.: refer to Attached Table 3 (1) (a) and (g)). .

Such information is unique information for each gaming machine model (in this example, this will be explained as "board management information", "unique information", or simply "identification information"), and for example, Even if gaming machines are manufactured by machine manufacturers and are equipped with main control boards with the same specifications, different types of gaming machines will have different board management information.

First, an example of mounting conventional board management information will be described with reference to FIG. For example, on the component mounting surface of the main control board (here, to make the explanation easier to understand, it is referred to as the same main control board 411 as in this example), any arbitrary material that does not affect at least the above-mentioned wiring patterns 411c and 411d etc. A unique information display section for displaying board management information at a position (for example, on the surface 411l where the above-mentioned insulated wiring pattern and ground pattern do not exist) (Here, to make the explanation easier to understand, we will use a unique information display section that does not correspond to this example. The same unique information display section 541) is provided.

In this conventional example, the unique information display section includes, for example, the "manufacturer name" (manufacturer name), which is the information corresponding to (a) above, and the model number (board management Board management information consisting of "＊＊＊＊＊＊-＊＊" (number) is displayed, but this is printed directly on the board surface (component mounting surface) using a laser.

According to such conventional examples, although a display is made that meets the above requirements, for example, if a game machine that has been installed at a game parlor is collected and its main control board is to be reused. , this can only be done for gaming machines of the same model (model) from the same gaming machine manufacturer. That is, considering the life cycle of a certain type of gaming machine from when it is introduced into the market until it is removed, it becomes practically difficult to reuse it.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, for example, the first When reusing a main control board with board management information printed on it, we also propose a method in which the first printed board management information is deleted by laser engraving, and then the second board management information is printed. was.

However, in recent years, as the roles played by the main control board have become more diverse, it is often not possible to secure a sufficient amount of such space. Considering this situation, it is necessary to consider a method that can change the display content of board management information in the same space as before.

Therefore, in this example, it is possible to rewrite the board management information with a simple configuration without compressing the space of the main control board (realizing space saving), and by reusing the main control board, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs. We propose a method that can achieve this goal. According to the method explained below, not only can the same main control board be reused for different models (models) of gaming machines made by the same gaming machine manufacturer, but also it can be used for one model (model) of one gaming machine manufacturer. The main control board thus created can be easily reused for other models (models) of other gaming machine manufacturers.

In this example, such a method is realized by configuring the unique information display section 541 to include a rewritable film 543, which will be described later, which is a rewritable heat-sensitive film. This is one of the characteristic parts of the main control board 411 in this example, and specific examples thereof will be described below as mounting examples 1 to 4.

Note that for the rewritable film 543 in this example, for example, rewritable laser media (label) of a rewritable laser system manufactured by Ricoh Co., Ltd. can be used. The rewritable laser system uses the laser irradiation unit of the rewritable laser marker device (laser printing device) to rewrite the information displayed on the rewritable laser media (label) while it is attached to the device (printing and erasing). (possible) and can be rewritten about 1000 times without having to peel it off.

Rewritable laser media (labels) are, for example, made of a silver polyester film (white PET) coated with white on the surface, and a recording layer, an oxygen blocking layer, and a UV blocking layer are laminated thereon. It can withstand laser irradiation heat of approximately 160°C during printing (approximately 100°C during erasing). Note that the heat-sensitive film that can be used as the rewritable film 543 in this example is not limited to this. As long as it satisfies similar requirements, it can be used as appropriate.

(Example 1 of mounting board management information on main control board 411)
Next, a first example of mounting board management information on the main control board 411 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 1, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 1 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 51, on the component mounting surface of the main control board 411, there are at least arbitrary positions that do not affect the above-mentioned wiring patterns 411c and 411d (for example, the above-mentioned insulated wiring patterns and ground patterns). A unique information display section 541 for displaying board management information is provided on the non-existing surface 411l. Note that the unique information display section 541 may be provided, for example, on the above-mentioned GND plane 411i. This also applies to the unique information display section 541 in installation examples 2 to 4, which will be described later.

Although the main control board case 460 is not shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, as described above, the main control board 411 is installed in the pachi-slot machine 401 while being housed in the transparent main control board case 460. The unique information display section 541 is mounted inside the main control board case 460, and the unique information display section 541 is located at a position where it can be viewed in that state (that is, at a position where the component mounting surface is not obstructed by the components of the main control board case 460). provided. This also applies to the unique information display section 541 in installation examples 2 to 4, which will be described later.

In installation example 1, (1) the unique information display section 541 is configured to include a rewritable film 543 on which the displayed information can be rewritten. The specific configuration will be described below using FIG. 52.

As described above, the main control board 411 is configured as a printed circuit board (PCB), and the unique information display section 541 is also a part thereof. Note that since no wiring pattern is arranged in the unique information display section 541 (that is, the copper foil has been removed), its illustration is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 52, a resist layer 545 as an insulating layer is formed on both sides of the board body 544 (the resist layer on the component mounting side (that is, the side where the unique information display section 541 is provided) is a resist layer 545a). , the resist layer on the non-component mounting surface side (that is, the side where the unique information display section 541 is not provided) is referred to as a resist layer 545b).

Note that since no electronic components are mounted on the unique information display section 541, illustration thereof is omitted in FIGS. 51 and 52; Component information for identifying the mounted electronic components is printed on its surface. For example, in FIG. 44, component information labeled "IC3" is printed near the location where IC3 is mounted (the same applies to IC4 to IC6).

Also, for example, component information labeled "CP1" is printed near the capacitor mounted on the left side of IC3, and "CP2" is printed near the capacitor mounted on the left side of IC4. For example, component information labeled "CP3" is printed near the capacitor mounted on the left side of IC5, and component information labeled "CP3" is printed near the capacitor mounted on the left side of IC6. For example, component information written as "CP4" is printed.

Here, the rewritable film 543 is configured to be disposed between the substrate body 544 and the resist layer 545a in the unique information display section 541. Note that the rewritable film 543 has a seal on the back side of the printed surface, so that it can be attached to the substrate body 544. That is, in this example, the rewritable film 543 is attached to the substrate body 544, and the resist layer 545a is laminated thereon.

However, since the rewritable film 543 is ultimately protected and fixed by the resist layer 545a, the rewritable film 543 is not attached to the substrate body 544 (that is, the back side of the printed surface is not a seal), and the rewritable film 543 is The resist layer 545a may be stacked on the resist layer 544. Alternatively, the configuration is such that it can be pasted on the back side of the resist layer 545a (that is, the printed surface is a seal), and when the resist layer 545a is laminated, it is placed on the substrate main body 544. It is also possible to do so.

Further, as long as the resistance to peeling is ensured, for example, the rewritable film 543 may be attached to the surface side of the resist layer 545a, or the rewritable film 543 may be fixed by other means. That is, any mode can be adopted as long as the display of the board management information can be changed by rewriting the rewritable film 543 without changing any other configuration of the main control board 411. It is.

Here, in mounting example 1, since the rewritable film 543 is disposed between the substrate main body 544 and the resist layer 545a in the unique information display section 541, the substrate management information can be rewritten from the outside of the resist layer 545a. There is a need to. Therefore, in this example, at least the resist layer 545a is configured to be transparent or semitransparent. In this case, for example, the resist layer 545a is made of a solder resist material that has a certain heat resistance (at least can withstand a temperature higher than the laser irradiation heat during printing) and transparency (at least does not interfere with laser irradiation during printing). It can be composed of Note that "semi-transparent" here means that the transparency is lower than completely transparent, but the transparency is such that it does not interfere with printing on the rewritable film 543. Further, the resist layer 545b may have a similar configuration or a different configuration.

Further, in mounting example 1, the dimensions of each component are as shown in the size table in FIG. 52. In the size table of FIG. 52, "rewritable film" represents the rewritable film 543, "substrate" represents the substrate body 544 in the unique information display section 541, and "resist thickness" represents the resist layer 545a (as described above, the resist layer 545b represents the thickness (for example, 0.02 mm) of the resist layer 545a (which may have the same structure as the resist layer 545a or may have a different structure). Note that these are just examples, and the sizes are not limited to these.

For example, the substrate main body 544 can have various thicknesses as shown in the size chart of FIG. 52. Further, the size (vertical x horizontal) of the unique information display section 541 can be any size as long as it is not smaller than the size of the rewritable film 543 and space can be secured on the main control board 411. . Further, for example, the size of the rewritable film 543 can be set to any size as long as necessary information can be appropriately displayed. Further, for example, the thickness of the resist layer 545a can be set to any desired thickness as long as the component mounting surface of the main control board 411 is appropriately protected and rewriting to the rewritable film 543 is not hindered.

Regarding the thickness of the resist layer 545a, the exemplified "0.02 mm" is a thickness assuming that the solder resist ink is applied once, and it may be made thicker by increasing the number of times the solder resist ink is applied. It is possible. For example, if it is desired to make the resist layer 545a 0.06 mm thick, this can be achieved by applying solder resist ink three times. However, if the resist layer 545a becomes thicker, the protection function as an insulating layer will improve, but the transparency will decrease. Therefore, the thickness of the resist layer 545a (in other words, the number of times the solder resist ink is applied) is determined by comprehensively considering the visibility of the board management information printed on the rewritable film 543, the quality when printing or erasing, etc. It may be selected based on the following. For example, if these problems do not occur (or are unlikely to occur), the thickness of the resist layer 545a is set to 0.06 mm (the number of times the solder resist ink is applied is 3 times), and the protective function (durability) is improved. You may also try to This also applies to mounting examples 2 to 4, which will be described later.

(Example 2 of mounting board management information on the main control board 411)
Next, a second example of mounting board management information on the main control board 411 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 2, and FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 2 is provided.

Note that, as is clear from a comparison between FIG. 51 and FIG. 53, or FIG. 52 and FIG. ) is the same as the mounting example 1. Therefore, here, the specific configuration of (2) below will be explained, and the explanation of the specific configuration of (1) above will be omitted.

In mounting example 2, (2) a recess 546 corresponding to the thickness of the rewritable film 543 is formed in the unique information display section 541 . The specific configuration will be described below using FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 54, a substrate body 544 in the unique information display section 541 is provided with a recess 546 that is concave in cross-sectional view. When viewed from the front (see FIG. 53), the recess 546 has a shape corresponding to the shape of the rewritable film 543 (see length x width of "rewritable film" in the size chart of FIG. 54) (in other words, the rewritable film 543 is placed therein). The thickness of the rewritable film 543 (the size of the rewritable film 543 in the size chart of FIG. '') (in other words, a depth that does not protrude from the surface of the substrate body 544 when the rewritable film 543 is placed).

Note that, as shown in the size table of FIG. 54 (see "Recess" in the size table of FIG. 54), the depth of the recess 546 is, for example, 0.3 mm, which is the same as the thickness of the rewritable film 543, so that the rewritable film 543 does not fit into the recess. When placed on the rewritable film 546, the upper surface of the rewritable film 543 may be flat with the surface of the substrate body 544, or the rewritable film 543 may be set to be 0.8 mm deeper than the thickness of the rewritable film 543. When the rewritable film 543 is placed in the recess 546, the upper surface of the rewritable film 543 may be lower than the surface of the substrate body 544. That is, the depth can be set to any desired depth as long as it does not hinder rewriting to the rewritable film 543.

However, in mounting example 2, the rewritable film 543 is placed directly on the surface of the board body 544 in mounting example 1, thereby preventing the board itself from becoming thicker and the resist layer 545a from easily peeling off. Therefore, from such a viewpoint, it is preferable that the recess 546 is configured to be at least deeper than the thickness of the rewritable film 543 (that is, the depth is approximately 0.3 mm or more to 1.0 mm).

In the example shown in FIG. 54, when the rewritable film 543 is placed in the recess 546, the upper surface of the rewritable film 543 is lower than the surface of the substrate body 544 (for example, the depth is set to 0.08 mm). ). In this case, as in Mounting Example 1, the solder resist ink is also applied to the recess 546 (also on the upper surface of the rewritable film 543), so the area within the recess 546 excluding the rewritable film 543 becomes part of the resist layer 545a. . Here, in the concave portion 546, for example, by increasing the number of times the solder resist ink is applied (or applying the amount to make the upper surface uniform), as shown in FIG. Although the resist layer 545a on the upper surface and the resist layer 545a in the recess 546 can be configured to be flat (or substantially flat), the manner in which the resist layer 545a is formed in the recess 546 is limited to this. do not have.

For example, even in the recessed portion 546, without increasing the number of times the solder resist ink is applied (or without applying the amount to make the upper surface uniform), the resist layer 545a on the upper surface of the rewritable film 543 in the recessed portion 546 can be applied to the unique information display portion 541. It may be configured to be lower than the resist layer 545a on the upper surface of the substrate main body 544 by the depth of the recess 546. Alternatively, for example, when the resist layer 545a is formed of a transparent resist film, the inside of the recess 546 may be configured to have a void. This also applies to mounting example 4, which will be described later.

(Example 3 of mounting board management information on main control board 411)
Next, a third example of mounting board management information on the main control board 411 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 3, and FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 3 is provided.

Note that, for example, as is clear from the comparison between FIG. 51 and FIG. 55, or FIG. 52 and FIG. ) is the same as the mounting example 1. Therefore, here, the specific configuration of (3) below will be explained, and the explanation of the specific configuration of (1) above will be omitted.

In mounting example 3, (3) in the unique information display section 541, a transparent plate 547 fixed to the substrate body 544 with a locking pin 548 is attached to the outside of the resist layer 545a. The specific configuration will be described below using FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the unique information display section 541, the substrate main body 544 has a surface on which the unique information display section 541 is provided (i.e., the resist layer 545a side) and a surface on which the unique information display section 541 is not provided (i.e., A through hole 549 is formed to penetrate between the resist layer 545b side). As shown in FIG. 55, four through holes 549 are provided corresponding to the four corners of the rectangular transparent plate 547 (in FIG. 55, the lower left one is the through hole 549a, and the lower right one is the through hole 549a). is defined as a through hole 549b, the upper right is defined as a through hole 549c, and the upper left is defined as a through hole 549d).

In addition, locking holes (numbers omitted) are formed in the transparent plate 547 at positions corresponding to the through holes 549a, 549b, 549c, and 549d, and locking pins 548 (not shown) are formed in the respective locking holes and through holes. A locking pin 548a is inserted into the through hole 549a and the corresponding locking hole, a locking pin 548b is inserted into the through hole 549b and the corresponding locking hole, and the locking pin 548b is inserted into the through hole 549b and the corresponding locking hole. The locking pin 548c is inserted into the corresponding locking hole, and the locking pin 548d is inserted into the through hole 549d and the corresponding locking hole. The body portion (number omitted) of the locking pin 548 is inserted into the resist layer 545b side, and the head portion (number omitted) of the locking pin 548 is configured to be locked in a locking hole of the transparent plate 547.

The end of the body of the locking pin 548 protruding from the resist layer 545b side is soldered to a solder portion (not shown) provided on the outer periphery of the through hole 549. In this way, the transparent plate 547 is fixed to the substrate body 544.

Note that the manner in which the through hole 549 is provided is not limited to this. For example, in the transparent plate 547, the locking hole is located at the left central part (for example, in FIG. 55, between the locking hole where the locking pin 548a is locked and the locking hole where the locking pin 548b is locked) and the center right side (for example, in FIG. 55, between the locking hole where the locking pin 548c is locked and the locking hole where the locking pin 548d is locked), and Correspondingly, the through holes 549 may also be provided at one location on each side of the fixed display section 541. Further, for example, in the transparent plate 547, the locking hole is located at the upper central portion (for example, in FIG. 55, the locking hole where the locking pin 548c is locked and the locking hole where the locking pin 548d is locked) (between) and the lower center portion (for example, in FIG. 55, between the locking hole where the locking pin 548a is locked and the locking hole where the locking pin 548b is locked). In order to correspond to this, the through holes 549 may also be provided in the fixed display section 541, one at the top and one at the top. That is, the number of fixing locations of the transparent plate 547 may be at least four or more than four, as long as the transparent plate 547 can be fixed with a constant strength.

Further, from the same viewpoint, the method of fixing the transparent plate 547 to the substrate main body 544 is not limited to the method using the locking pin 548 described above. For example, it may be fixed to the substrate body 544 using an adhesive. Alternatively, the periphery (or a part of it) of the transparent plate 547 may be plated, and the board body 544 in the fixed display section 541 may have a solder surface, and the transparent plate 547 may be attached to the board body 544 by soldering. It may be fixed. That is, as long as the transparent plate 547 can be properly fixed to the substrate body 544, any fixing member may be used to fix the transparent plate 547.

Here, in mounting example 3, since the rewritable film 543 is disposed between the board body 544 and the transparent plate 547 in the unique information display section 541, the board management information can be rewritten from the outside of the transparent plate 547. There is a need to. Therefore, in this example, the transparent plate 547 has a certain heat resistance (at least can withstand a temperature higher than the laser irradiation heat during printing) and transparency (at least does not interfere with laser irradiation during printing). It may be made of acrylic material or the like. Although this is just an example, an Aronix (registered trademark) sheet (glass substitute resin) manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. can be used for the transparent plate 547.

Further, the dimensions (length and width and thickness) of the transparent plate 547 are as shown in the size chart of FIG. 56, but this is also just an example. That is, as long as there is no problem in rewriting to the rewritable film 543, the rewritable film 543 can be properly protected without hindering the display, and it can be fixed to the substrate body 544, it can be made into any size. can.

In mounting example 3, on the back surface side of the transparent plate 547 (the surface on the substrate main body 544 side), the upper surface of the rewritable film 543 is in close contact with the resist layer 545a laminated thereon, but on the other surfaces, It is configured so that it does not come into close contact with the resist layer 545a (that is, a gap is provided between it and the resist layer 545a). However, the manner in which the gap is provided is not limited to this. For example, when the length of the body of the locking pin 548 is adjusted and the end of the body of the locking pin 548 is soldered on the surface where the unique information display section 541 is not provided, the transparent plate 547 A certain gap may also be formed between the back side and the resist layer 545a laminated on the top surface of the rewritable film 543. That is, the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a may not be in close contact with each other, and a gap may be provided on any surface.

(Example 4 of loading board management information on main control board 411)
Next, a fourth example of mounting board management information on the main control board 411 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 4, and FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a cross section of a location where the unique information display section 541 in mounting example 4 is provided.

Note that, for example, as is clear from a comparison between FIG. 51 and FIG. 57, or FIG. 52 and FIG. 58, installation example 4 adds the specific configurations (2) and (3) above to installation example 1. , The specific configuration of (1) above is the same as the mounting example 1. Furthermore, as is clear from a comparison between FIGS. 53 and 57 or FIGS. 54 and 58, mounting example 4 adds the specific configuration of (3) above to mounting example 2, and ) is the same as the mounting example 2. Furthermore, as is clear from a comparison between FIG. 55 and FIG. 57 or FIG. 56 and FIG. 58, mounting example 4 adds the specific configuration (2) above to mounting example 3, ) is the same as the mounting example 3.

In other words, installation example 4 is configured to have all the specific configurations of (1) to (3) above, and the specific configurations of (1) to (3) above are the same as those already explained. It is. Therefore, descriptions of these specific configurations will be omitted below.

In addition, in the mounting example 4, the back side of the transparent plate 547 (the surface on the substrate main body 544 side) is basically configured to be in close contact with the resist layer 545a (that is, there is no gap between the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a). has been done. However, the arrangement relationship between the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a is not limited to this. For example, when the length of the body of the locking pin 548 is adjusted and the end of the body of the locking pin 548 is soldered on the surface where the unique information display section 541 is not provided, the transparent plate 547 It may be configured such that a certain gap is created between the back side and the resist layer 545a. That is, the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a may not be in close contact with each other, and a gap may be provided on any surface.

Further, for example, a spacer may be placed at a predetermined position of the substrate body 544 in the unique information display section 541 (for example, around the opening of the through hole 549), and the resist layer 545a may be coated on the substrate body 544 from above the spacer. Then, when the transparent plate 547 is attached, the back side of the transparent plate 547 and the resist layer 545a are in close contact with each other in the spacer portion, but may not be in close contact with each other in other portions.

(Example of printing on rewritable film on main control board 411)
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, an example of printing on the rewritable film 543 on the main control board 411 will be described. As described above, since the rewritable film 543 is configured to be rewritable, it is possible to print various board management information, and FIG. 59 shows an example thereof.

In FIG. 59A, the above-mentioned manufacturer name ("Manufacturer name" in FIG. 59A) and the above-mentioned model number (board management number) ("＊＊＊＊＊＊-**" in FIG. 59A) are printed. This is an example. In this example, for example, it is possible to print the content shown in FIG. 59A, erase it, and reprint the content shown in FIG. 59B or 59C. Necessary information may be printed. Of course, the information to be printed is not limited to these, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, FIG. 59B shows the above-mentioned manufacturer name ("Manufacturer name" in FIG. 59B) and the above-mentioned model number (board management number) ("＊＊＊＊＊＊-**" in FIG. 59B). This is an example in which a code ("substrate management barcode" in FIG. 59B) configured to be readable by a predetermined device (for example, a barcode reader, etc.) for identifying unique information is printed. .

In addition, FIG. 59C shows the above-mentioned manufacturer name ("Manufacturer name" in FIG. 59C) and the above-mentioned model number (board management number) ("＊＊＊＊＊＊-**" in FIG. 59C). , a code ("QR code (registered trademark) for board management" in FIG. 59C) configured to be readable by a predetermined device (e.g., a mobile terminal, etc.) for identifying unique information is printed. This is an example.

In addition, in FIGS. 59B and 59C, the manufacturer's name and model number (board control number) are omitted, and only the above-mentioned symbols are printed, as long as appropriate display is performed that meets the above requirements. Good too.

[10-5. Expansion example of main control board according to another example]
Up to this point, we have described a gaming machine (pachislot machine 401) equipped with a main control board (main control board 411) according to another example, but its configuration is not limited to the above, and various changes and expansions are possible. . An example of such expansion will be described below, although it is just an example. Note that such an expanded example is also applicable to the pachi-slot machine 1 that includes the main control board 71. That is, the expansion example shown below is applicable to everything described as the main control board (and the configuration of its peripheral parts) in this embodiment. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to control boards other than the main control board (for example, the sub-control board 412, the door relay board 413, the sub-relay board 414, etc.) without departing from the purpose of the invention.

(Structure that allows confirmation of the back side of the main control board)
As described above, the main control board 411 is installed inside the pachi-slot machine 1 while being housed in the main control board case 460, and in this state, the component mounting side is the front surface and is easily visible from the outside. On the other hand, the non-component mounted side is the back side, making it difficult to see from the outside. However, the configuration of the main control board case 460 is not limited to this, and may have a structure that allows easy confirmation of the back surface of the main control board 411, for example.

For example, in the manufacturing process, it is possible to determine whether the board uses surface mount components (or which electronic components are used as surface mount components) or whether the board uses dip components (or which electronic components are used as dip components). This makes it easier to check whether there are any errors in the installation of the circuit board (or electronic components) even after assembly has been completed, and also prevents unauthorized modification even after installation at the game arcade. It also becomes easier to confirm whether any equipment for this purpose is attached to the back surface of the main control board 411. In other words, there is an effect that the convenience at the time of confirmation can be improved. Therefore, it is desirable that the back surface of the main control board 411 has a structure that allows it to be easily recognized without unsealing (opening) the back surface of the main control board 411 when it is housed in the main control board case 460. An example of the specifications will be explained below.

For example, the main control board case 460 has a structure that is rotatable (rotatable) when installed in the pachi-slot machine 401 (attached inside the pachi-slot machine 401), and the main control board case 460 By rotating the main control board 411, the back surface of the main control board 411 can be made visible. In this case, the main control board case 460 serves as a base body, which is the side on which the main control board 411 is arranged (i.e., the side where the back side of the main control board 411 is made visible), and a lid for the base body (i.e., It is configured in combination with a cover body (the side that makes the surface of the main control board 411 visible), and with the main control board 411 housed inside, the main control board 71 shown in FIG. It is configured so that it can be attached to a predetermined position inside the pachi-slot machine 401 so that the board surface is perpendicular (substantially perpendicular) to the bottom or top surface of the casing (casing 2).

Note that the mounting position of the main control board case 460 may be, for example, the back side of the front door (front door) like the main control board 71 shown in FIG. The back side of the main control board 411 (component mounting surface) faces the back wall (rear wall G3) of the cabinet when the front door is closed, so it is visible from the outside when the front door is open. The non-mounted surface (non-mounted surface) faces the opposite side from the front surface, so it cannot be seen from the outside just by opening the front door), or it may be located at any position on the rear wall inside the cabinet (in this case, the main control board The surface of the main control board 411 (component mounting surface) faces the back side of the front door when the front door is closed, so it is visible from the outside when the front door is open. The mounting surface (mounted surface) faces the opposite side from the front surface, so it cannot be seen from the outside just by opening the front door). Alternatively, it may be located at any position on the side wall (side wall G2) within the cabinet.

Further, the main control board case 460 includes a rotation shaft portion that functions as a rotation shaft portion on one end side (for example, the lower end side), and the mounting position of the main control board case 460 is A holding member is provided that is fixed to the main control board and is capable of pivotally supporting the rotating shaft portion, and when the main control board case 460 is attached to the holding member, the main control board case 460 is held in a rotatable state by the holding member. (This includes cases in which the main control board case 460 and the holding member are assembled in advance and a similar configuration is achieved by attaching this to the mounting position.) Note that the other end side (for example, the upper end side) of the main control board case 460 is in an engaged state with the holding member (i.e., a state in which the main control board case 460 cannot be rotated) or in a non-engaged state (i.e., a state in which the main control board case 460 cannot be rotated). , a state in which the main control board case 460 can be rotated) (for example, a fixing device consisting of a push-in pin and a receiving part that can be switched between an engaged state and a non-engaged state by hand without using tools) push fasteners, etc.) shall be provided.

If an operator (e.g., an employee at a game parlor) wants to check the back side of the main control board 411, he or she can operate the switching mechanism (e.g., pull the push fastener) to release the engaged state (e.g. , the upper end side is opened, and the main control board case 460 can be rotated toward the front (using the lower end rotation axis as the rotation axis), so that the back side of the main control board 411 can be viewed. do it. Note that as another example of the switching mechanism, it is also possible to employ, for example, a screwing mechanism that allows the holding member and the main control board case 460 to be screwed together from the outside. That is, any structure is applicable as long as the holding member and the other end of the main control board case 460 can be attached and detached without destroying the holding member or the main control board case 460.

The direction of rotation of the main control board case 460 may be such that a sufficient space for rotation can be secured depending on the mounting position of the main control board case 460 (in other words, the main control board 411). When applied to a pachinko machine, the space on the back side of the pachinko machine is taken into consideration). For example, the main control board case 460 may be configured to rotate vertically by providing the rotation shaft on the lower end side (or the upper end side), or the rotation shaft portion may be provided on the left end side (or the right end side). ), the main control board case 460 may be rotated laterally. Note that it is desirable that the rotatable angle is at least about 15 degrees or more so that the back surface of the substrate can be seen. However, in order to make it easier to see the back side of the substrate, it is preferable to secure an angle of about 90 degrees as long as space is available.

Furthermore, when the main control board case 460 is rotated, it is desirable to arrange it so that it does not collide with other components (for example, the outer wall of the reel unit, etc.). For example, if it does not collide with other components at a position rotated 15 degrees from the fixed position, then at a further rotated angle position (for example, a position rotated 30 degrees from the fixed position). Such a structure may be adopted even if it may collide with other structural members. However, it is important to arrange the arrangement so that it does not hit components that are not desirable to be subjected to impact (for example, the board case in which the sub-control board 412, the door relay board 413, the sub-relay board 414, etc. are housed, the power supply unit 415, etc.). It is desirable to adopt a rotatable angle.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the front and back surfaces of the main control board 411 can be visually recognized without rotating the main control board case 460. For example, the front surface of the main control board 411 should face the top surface of the casing, and the back surface should face the bottom surface of the casing (that is, the board surface should be parallel (approximately parallel) to the bottom or top surface of the casing (casing 2). ), the main control board case 460 (the side edge of it) is attached to a predetermined position inside the pachi-slot machine 401, and furthermore, at that mounting position, the main control board 411 has a board on both the front side and the back side. It is sufficient to ensure a space in which the surface can be visually recognized.

In the main control board case 460, the above-mentioned base body and cover body are fixed by a sealing member (referred to as "case caulking") that leaves traces of the sealing member when opened. A control board case 460 (for example, it may include a holding member or may not include a holding member) and a game machine main body (for example, if the main control board case 460 here includes a holding member) It may refer to other structural members at the attachment position of the holding member, or if the holding member is not included, it may refer to the holding member or other structural members in the vicinity). , the main control board case 460 may be fixed using a sealing member (hereinafter referred to as "body caulking") configured to leave a trace when the main control board case 460 is removed. That is, it is possible to provide a case crimping but not a main body crimping, or to provide a case crimping and then a main body crimping.

(Material indicated on main control board case)
When a game machine once installed in a game parlor is collected and its component parts are to be reused, there are two cases: reuse through reuse, and reuse through recycling. Reuse here means to reuse as is. For example, there is a case where the recovered main control board case 460 is directly incorporated into another model of the same structure. On the other hand, recycling here means that game machine manufacturers and recycling companies collect disassembled parts as materials and reprocess them to regenerate them as new materials. For example, plastic parts from game machines are collected and recycled as new plastic.

As described above, in this example, the number of reuses of the main control board 411 can be increased by the method using the rewritable film 543, but for example, the main control board case 460 cannot be reused as is and may be recycled. Here, since there are multiple types of transparent resin used for the main control board case 460, recycling becomes difficult if the material cannot be identified, and there is a problem that it is difficult to identify the material from the outside.

Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the main control board case 460 is provided with a display that allows identification of the material (material identification display). This has the effect of improving reusability. For example, if the material is polycarbonate, <PC> is written on the main control board case 460, and if the material is ABS resin, <ABS> is written. Note that the material identification display can be attached using various methods. For example, a method of marking (printing) using laser marking or the like may be adopted, or such a notation may be added in advance (integrally molded) when molding the case.

In addition, the base body and the cover body described above may be both labeled with material identification so that the respective materials can be recognized even after they are separated, and it is also possible to make sure that they are basically made of the same material. Therefore, a material identification indication may be attached to at least one of the members. Note that the specific material display is desirably provided at a position that does not overlap with the unique information display section 541 so as not to obstruct at least the visibility of the rewritable film 543.

(Explanatory information on main control board case)
As described above, the role ratio monitor 483 is provided on the main control board 411, but it is also possible to provide other indicators such as a 7-segment LED or a lamp (for example, an operation check LED described later). be. When a plurality of such displays are provided, it may be difficult to understand the function or role of each display (such as what is displayed by the display) from the outside. Therefore, in order to enable workers (for example, game parlor staff, etc.) to understand the functions and roles of the display at a glance, a display is provided on the main control board 411 that allows the type of display to be identified. (Explanatory information) may be attached to a position corresponding to the target display on the main control board case 460. This has the effect of improving convenience for the operator.

For example, if the main control board 411 is provided with a role ratio monitor 483, a status display for displaying the status of the main control board 411, and a setting display for displaying set values. do. In this case, explanatory information such as "role ratio monitor" is attached to an arbitrary position on the main control board case 460 that is near the role ratio monitor 483 when viewed from the front, and the main control board is located near the status display when viewed from the front. Explanatory information “Status display” is attached to an arbitrary position on the board case 460, and explanatory information “Setting” is attached to an arbitrary position on the main control board case 460 that is near the setting display when viewed from the front. All you have to do is attach it. Note that, similar to the specific material display described above, explanatory information can also be attached using various methods. Furthermore, it is desirable that the explanatory information be provided at a position that does not overlap with the unique information display section 541 so as not to obstruct at least the visibility of the rewritable film 543.

(LED for operation check and its explanation)
As described above, an operation check LED may be provided on the main control board 411 to enable confirmation of various operation conditions related to the game (whether or not the operation is normal). Note that the operation check LED is configured as a plurality of LED groups, each corresponding to various operation parts and various sensors, for example, and when the corresponding operation part is being operated or the corresponding sensor is in the on state. The operating status of each light can be checked by lighting them up individually (turning off when the corresponding operation part is not being operated or the corresponding sensor is not in the on state).

For example, when the start lever 7 is being operated (i.e., when the start switch 431 is in the ON state), one corresponding LED lights up, but when the start lever 7 is not being operated (i.e., the start switch 431 is in the ON state), one corresponding LED lights up. 431 is in the off state), its LED is turned off. The other operation parts connected to the main control board 411, such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the settlement button 9, have the same configuration, and even if they are not being operated. If the device is not being operated, the corresponding LED will turn on, and if no operation is being performed, the corresponding LED will turn off.

For example, when the medals inserted from the medal slot 5 are passing through the interior (that is, when the medal sensor 31S (here, see FIG. 3 as an example) is in the on state), the corresponding 1 However, when the medals inserted from the medal slot 5 are not passing through the inside (that is, when the medal sensor 31S is in the off state), the LED is turned off. Note that the chute sensor (sensor on the route that discharges medals into the medal tray 12 when medals are not accepted), and the sensor for the door open/close switch 436 (turns on when the door is closed and turns off when the door is open). , the other sensors connected to the main control board 411, such as the error release sensor (a sensor that can detect a reset operation in the locking mechanism 15), have the same configuration, and if the sensor is in the on state, the corresponding LED lights up. However, if the sensor is in the off state, the corresponding LED is turned off.

Here, it is also possible to attach explanatory information on the main control board case 460 for each LED in the operation check LED as described above, but if there are a large number of LEDs, sufficient space must be secured. Otherwise, the visibility of the main control board 411 may be significantly reduced. Therefore, an LED correspondence table indicating which operation part or sensor each LED corresponds to should be placed near the mounting position of the main control board case 460 (or at any position within the case as long as the correspondence can be confirmed). It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the Note that the LED correspondence table may be configured as a sticker that can be pasted at any position. Further, in this case, the sticker may be pasted on the main control board case 460. However, in this case, in order not to obstruct the visibility of the rewritable film 543, it should be pasted at a position that does not overlap with the unique information display section 541 (or the sticker of the LED correspondence table should be pasted so that the visibility of the unique information display section 541 is not obstructed). It is desirable to have an unobstructed shape.

(Management information on main control board case)
Management information for managing the main control board 411 and the main control board case 460 (for example, information that is different from the above-mentioned unique information and that allows the manufacturer to identify products and parts) is stored on the main control board It may also be configured to be attached on the case 460. In this case, the management information can be configured, for example, as a barcode or QR code (registered trademark), and if a sticker with such a code printed is pasted on the main control board case 460. good. In this case, the rewritable film 543 should be affixed at a position that does not overlap the unique information display section 541 so as not to obstruct its visibility (or the management information sticker may be pasted at a position that does not overlap the unique information display section 541 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the rewritable film 543). It is desirable that the shape is unobstructed.

[10-6. Gaming machine using the specifications of the main control board according to another example]
In this example, by using the specifications regarding the test points (TP) described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example. Note that each configuration related to the test point (TP) described as a specification of the main control board 411 in this example may be applied to control boards other than the main control board 411 (for example, the sub control board 412, the door It is also applicable to the relay board 413, sub relay board 414, etc.).

For example, a main control board 411 equipped with at least a main control unit 411a that controls the progress of a game includes a plurality of surface mount components (for example, IC3 to IC6) whose terminals are soldered on the front side of the board. , the terminals are inserted into the through holes 411g penetrating the board from the front side of the board, and the terminals are soldered on the back side of the board for a plurality of dip-mounted parts (for example, resistors and capacitors as dip parts). ) is mounted, and when a terminal of one surface mount component and a terminal of another surface mount component are connected by a wire, a test point (TP) connected to the wire is provided. be.

Further, for example, a test point (TP) is a gaming machine that is provided when the terminal pitch of each surface-mounted component connected by wiring is equal to or less than a specific size (eg, 1.27 mm).

Further, for example, a test point (TP) is a gaming machine that is provided when a dip-mounted component is not connected in the wiring between the terminal of one surface-mounted component and the terminal of another surface-mounted component.

Further, for example, the test point (TP) is a gaming machine in which the test point (TP) is not provided on the back side of the main control board 411 (for example, the non-component mounting surface).

Further, for example, the dip-mounted component is a game machine that includes a resistor and a capacitor whose terminals are constituted by a pair of lead wires.

Further, for example, all surface-mounted components are game machines whose surface areas exceed a predetermined size (for example, 6 square mm).

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine in which the main control board 411 is equipped with a medal number control section 411b that performs control related to management of gaming values.

Further, for example, the main control microprocessor 470 included in the main control section 411a and the medal number control microprocessor 480 included in the medal number control section 411b are gaming machines having the same configuration.

For example, the test point (TP) is a terminal of one surface mount component (for example, IC3 or IC4) mounted on the connection path between the main control section 411a and the number of medals control section 411b, and a terminal of another surface mount component (for example, IC3 or IC4). This is a gaming machine that is connected to a wiring between a terminal of a component (for example, IC5 or IC6).

Further, for example, the main control board 411 is equipped with a winning ratio monitor 483 that can display at least predetermined ratio information regarding the game, and the winning ratio monitor 483 is a gaming machine connected to the medal number control section 411b.

Further, for example, the main control board 411 is equipped with a medal number clear switch 444 that can initialize information regarding the gaming value managed by the medal number control unit 411b. This gaming machine is connected to the main control board 411 and is configured to be accessible from outside the main control board case 460 while the main control board 411 is housed in the main control board case 460.

Further, in this example, by using the specifications regarding the above-described rewritable film 543, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example. Note that each configuration related to the rewritable film 543 described as the specifications of the main control board 411 in this example may be applied to control boards other than the main control board 411 (for example, the sub-control board 412, the door relay board), without departing from the purpose of the invention. 413, sub relay board 414, etc.).

For example, the main control board 411 is installed inside the pachi-slot machine 401 while being housed in a transparent main control board case 460, and in this state, a unique information display for displaying board management information is displayed at a visible position. The unique information display section 541 is a gaming machine configured to include a rewritable film 543 that is a rewritable heat-sensitive film.

Further, for example, the main control board 411 includes a board main body 544 on the surface of which a conductive wiring pattern is disposed, and a resist layer 545 covering the surface of the board main body, and the resist layer 545 is transparent or A semi-transparent rewritable film 543 is disposed between a board body 544 and a resist layer 545 in a unique information display section 541, and is a gaming machine configured such that board management information can be rewritten from outside the resist layer 545. .

Further, for example, the main control board 411 has a surface on which the unique information display section 541 is provided (for example, a surface on which the resist layer 545a is formed) as a component mounting surface, and a plurality of electronic components can be mounted on the component mounting surface. This is a gaming machine in which component information for identifying mounted electronic components is printed on the surface of the resist layer 545a on the component mounting surface other than the unique information display section 541.

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine in which wiring patterns (for example, wiring patterns 411c and 411d) are not arranged on the board body 544 in the unique information display section 541.

Further, for example, in a gaming machine, a concave portion 546 corresponding to the thickness of the rewritable film 543 is formed in the substrate main body 544 in the unique information display section 541.

Further, for example, a transparent plate 547 fixed to the substrate main body 545 with a fixing member (for example, a locking pin 548) is attached to the outside of the resist layer 545a in the unique information display section 541, and the rewritable film 543 is attached to the outside of the resist layer 545a. This gaming machine is configured such that board management information can be rewritten from the outside of the 547.

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine in which a gap is provided at least in part between the resist layer 545a and the transparent plate 547.

Further, for example, in the unique information display section 541, a recess 546 corresponding to the thickness of the rewritable film 543 is formed in the substrate main body 544, and a fixing member (for example, A transparent plate 547 is attached to the board main body 545 with locking pins 548), and the rewritable film 543 is a gaming machine configured such that board management information can be rewritten from the outside of the transparent board 547.

Further, for example, the transparent plate 547 is a gaming machine in which at least a portion of the back side thereof is in close contact with the resist layer 545a.

For example, in the unique information display section 541, the board body 544 has a surface on which the unique information display section 541 is provided (for example, a component mounting surface) and a surface on which the unique information display section 541 is not provided (for example, a non-component mounting surface). ), a plurality of through holes (for example, through holes 549) are formed in the transparent plate 547, and locking holes are formed in positions corresponding to the through holes. A locking pin 548 has a body portion that is inserted into the hole and a head that is locked in the locking hole, and is locked so that the head of the locking pin 548 is locked in the locking hole. The transparent plate 547 is fixed to the board body 544 by inserting the body of the pin 548 into the locking hole and the through hole and soldering the end of the body that protrudes to the surface where the unique information display section 541 is not provided. It is a gaming machine that

Further, for example, in a game machine, the through hole formed in the board main body 544 is formed as a through hole 549 that can conduct electricity.

[10-7. Summary of inventions related to gaming machines using specifications of main control boards according to other examples (additional notes)]
As explained above, a gaming machine using the specifications of the main control board according to another example can be provided with the following configuration.

(First invention group)
Conventional gaming machines have been proposed in which surface-mounted components are used for the main control device (main control board) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2021-90627).

Incidentally, such a control board is desirably configured so that it can be inspected using a measuring instrument such as a digital oscilloscope for the purpose of verifying the operation of the circuit or identifying a failure location. In particular, the main control board of a game machine performs the main control of the game, and is extremely necessary to ensure the fairness and reliability of the game.

However, compared to dip-mounted components, surface-mounted components often have thinner terminals or narrower terminals. Therefore, there is a possibility that such an inspection cannot be performed appropriately. However, surface mount components are often more readily available and cheaper than dip mount components. From this point of view, if the main control board is designed without using surface mount components, a problem arises in that the manufacturing cost increases.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce manufacturing costs.

In order to achieve the above object, the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
A gaming machine comprising a main control board (e.g., main control board 411) on which is mounted at least a main control part (e.g., main control part 411a) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control board includes a plurality of surface mount components whose terminals are soldered on the front side of the board, and the terminals are inserted into through holes penetrating the board from the front side of the board. A plurality of dip-mounted components whose terminals are soldered on the back side are mounted,
When a terminal of one of the surface mount components and a terminal of another surface mount component is connected by a wire, a test pattern (for example, a test point) connected to the wire is provided. .
According to this gaming machine, the main control board uses surface-mounted components for at least some of the electronic components, and test patterns are provided in the connection paths between the surface-mounted components. Probes and the like can perform appropriate inspections even in difficult-to-access areas, making it possible to reduce manufacturing costs without compromising the fairness or reliability of the game.

(2) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The test pattern is characterized in that it is provided when the terminal pitch of each of the surface mount components connected by wiring is equal to or less than a specific size (for example, 1.27 mm).
According to this gaming machine, if the terminal pitch of a surface-mounted component exceeds a specific size, it is determined that it can be inspected without using a test pattern, and if the terminal pitch of a surface-mounted component is less than a specific size, the conditions (constraints) for providing a test pattern are determined. Since only one test pattern is used, circuit design can be carried out smoothly, and there is no need to provide unnecessary test patterns, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

(3) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The test pattern is characterized in that it is provided when the dip-mounted component is not connected in the wiring between the terminal of one of the surface-mounted components and the terminal of the other surface-mounted component.
According to this gaming machine, even if the connection path between surface-mounted components is connected to a dip-mounted component, it can be inspected without using a test pattern. Since one of the conditions (constraints) for providing a test pattern is the case where no test pattern is provided, the range of choices during circuit design can be expanded, and there is no need to provide unnecessary test patterns, further reducing manufacturing costs. It is possible to reduce the amount of

(4) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The test pattern is characterized in that it is not provided on the back side of the main control board.
According to this gaming machine, while ensuring the fairness and reliability of gaming by providing a test pattern, for example, when inspecting with a measuring device, it is only necessary to check the necessary and minimum number of points. It is possible to improve the convenience of inspection while reducing manufacturing costs.

(5) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The dip-mounted component is characterized in that its terminals include a resistor and a capacitor each formed of a pair of lead wires.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to mount more appropriate electronic components depending on various factors such as application and strength, including whether or not to provide a test pattern. The fairness and reliability of the system can be further improved.

(6) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
Each of the surface mount components is characterized in that its surface area exceeds a predetermined size (for example, 6 square mm).
According to this gaming machine, even if surface-mounted parts are used, they are not used if they are too small, which improves the convenience of inspection and, for example, Since it becomes easier to discover defects and fraudulent activities, it is possible to further improve the fairness and reliability of games while reducing manufacturing costs.

(7) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The main control board is characterized in that a gaming value control section (for example, a medal number control section 411b) that performs control related to management of gaming values is installed.
According to this gaming machine, the main control board is configured so that it can not only proceed with the game but also manage the gaming value, so for example, it is necessary to separately provide a board for the gaming value control section and its case. At the same time, strict management of the main control board will make it easier to prevent fraudulent activity, making it possible to reduce manufacturing costs and further improve the fairness and reliability of games.

(8) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
A main control microprocessor (e.g., main control microprocessor 470) included in the main control unit; a gaming value control microprocessor (e.g., medal number control microprocessor 480) included in the gaming value control unit; are characterized by having the same configuration.
According to this gaming machine, even if the main control board is equipped with multiple microprocessors with different control contents, it is easier to standardize the circuit design, program design, etc., and it is also easier to obtain this at a lower price. Furthermore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The test pattern is connected to wiring between a terminal of one of the surface mount components and a terminal of the other surface mount component mounted on a connection path between the main control section and the gaming value control section. It is characterized by
According to this gaming machine, the connection path between the main control section and the gaming value control section, which cooperate with each other to carry out the main control of the game, is determined to be particularly important, and a test pattern is provided for the surface mount components on that path. This makes it possible to further improve the fairness and reliability of the game.

(10) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The main control board is equipped with a display device (for example, a winning ratio monitor 483) capable of displaying at least predetermined ratio information regarding the game,
The display device is characterized in that it is connected to the gaming value control section.
According to this gaming machine, since the display device capable of displaying predetermined ratio information is controlled by the gaming value control section, the control load on the main control section can be reduced, thereby improving the fairness and reliability of the game. can be further increased.

(11) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The main control board is equipped with an initialization switch (for example, medal number clear switch 444) that can initialize information regarding the gaming value managed by the gaming value control unit,
The initialization switch is connected to the gaming value control section and is configured to be accessible from outside the case while the main control board is housed in the case.
According to this gaming machine, since the initialization switch that can initialize information regarding gaming value is controlled by the gaming value control section, the control load on the main control section can be reduced, thereby improving the fairness of the game. Reliability can be further improved. Moreover, since only the information regarding the gaming value can be initialized without initializing the entire gaming machine, the convenience of its operation can also be improved.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

(Second invention group)
Conventionally, a control board for controlling gaming operations in a gaming machine is housed in a transparent board case and installed inside it to prevent fraud, and it is not easy to identify it in that state. For example, it is required to display unique identification information (board management information) including the name of the manufacturer of the game machine, its model name, etc.

In such gaming machines, the main body of the control board is provided with multiple identification information display sections with different identification information printed on them, and by making it possible to selectively separate the identification information display sections other than the necessary identification information display sections, usage patterns can be improved. A device that can display only identification information according to the information has been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-68112). According to the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2006-68112, the same control board can be used between different models, thereby increasing its versatility and reducing manufacturing costs.

By the way, in recent years, in order to further reduce manufacturing costs and to take environmental issues into account, gaming machines that have been installed in game arcades are collected and replaced with components that do not have any operational problems. There is a desire to reuse them in new gaming machines. However, as described above, since the control board is required to display unique identification information, it is difficult to reuse such a control board. For example, in the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-68112, even if there is a choice at the time of initial shipment, the same problem will still occur after the selected identification information is displayed and shipped. . That is, there is a need for a way to easily change the identification information already displayed on the control board.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce manufacturing costs.

In order to achieve the above object, the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control board (for example, main control board 411) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control board is mounted inside the gaming machine while being housed in a transparent board case (for example, main control board case 460), and has unique information (for example, board management A unique information display unit (for example, unique information display unit 541) for displaying information) is provided,
The unique information display section is characterized in that it includes a rewritable heat-sensitive film (for example, a rewritable film 543).
According to this gaming machine, since the unique information display section for displaying unique information includes a rewritable heat-sensitive film, for example, a state in which one unique information is already displayed on the main control board Even so, it is possible to reuse the main control board by rewriting it with other unique information without making any changes to the configuration itself, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(2) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The main control board includes a board body (for example, a board body 544) on the surface of which a conductive wiring pattern is arranged, and an insulating layer (for example, a resist layer 545) that covers the surface of the board body. ,
The insulating layer is configured to be transparent or semitransparent,
The heat-sensitive film is disposed between the substrate body and the insulating layer in the unique information display section, and is configured such that the unique information can be rewritten from outside the insulating layer.
According to this gaming machine, a heat-sensitive film is placed between the board body and the insulating layer, and the unique information can be rewritten from outside the insulating layer, so the advantage of being able to rewrite the unique information remains unchanged. Since the substrate itself and the heat-sensitive film portion can be appropriately protected, the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the substrate structure can be made more reliable.

(3) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The main control board has a surface on which the unique information display section is provided (for example, a surface on which the resist layer 545a is formed) as a component mounting surface, and a plurality of electronic components can be mounted on the component mounting surface,
In the component mounting surface other than the unique information display section, component information for identifying the mounted electronic component is printed on the surface of the insulating layer.
According to this gaming machine, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the component mounting surface other than the unique information display section, and component information that can identify these electronic components is printed on the insulating layer. Since not only the unique information but also the substrate configuration itself can be easily viewed, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost and improve the confirmability.

(4) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
In the unique information display section, the wiring pattern is not arranged on the substrate body.
According to this gaming machine, for example, the visibility of the wiring pattern is not obstructed by the heat-sensitive film, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the visibility of the wiring pattern can be improved. Further, even when rewriting the unique information, for example, the wiring pattern is not affected in any way, so it is possible to provide a board configuration with higher reliability.

(5) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
In the unique information display section, a recess (for example, a recess 546) corresponding to the thickness of the heat-sensitive film is formed in the substrate body.
According to this gaming machine, even if the heat-sensitive film is placed between the board body and the insulating layer, there may be some problem with the board structure itself, such as the board itself becoming thicker or the insulating layer easily peeling off. In addition, since the material for the insulating layer can be selected without considering the heat-sensitive film, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost and provide a more reliable substrate configuration.

(6) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
A transparent plate (for example, a transparent plate 547) fixed to the substrate body with a fixing member (for example, a locking pin 548) is attached to the outside of the insulating layer in the unique information display section,
The heat-sensitive film is characterized in that the unique information can be rewritten from outside the transparent plate.
According to this gaming machine, the part where the heat-sensitive film is placed is further protected by a transparent plate, and the unique information can be rewritten even in that state, so the advantage that the unique information is rewritable is maintained. Since the heat-sensitive film portion can be more strongly protected, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost and provide a more reliable substrate configuration.

(7) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
A gap may be provided at least in a portion between the insulating layer and the transparent plate.
According to this gaming machine, the insulating layer located under the transparent plate is less affected by the transparent plate, so it is possible to protect the heat-sensitive film part more strongly and also protect the original board structure. , it is possible to achieve a substrate configuration with higher reliability while reducing manufacturing costs.

(8) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
In the unique information display section, a recess (for example, a recess 546) corresponding to the thickness of the heat-sensitive film is formed in the substrate main body,
A transparent plate (for example, a transparent plate 547) fixed to the substrate body with a fixing member (for example, a locking pin 548) is attached to the outside of the insulating layer in the unique information display section,
The heat-sensitive film is characterized in that the unique information can be rewritten from outside the transparent plate.
According to this gaming machine, even if the heat-sensitive film is placed between the board body and the insulating layer, there may be some problem with the board structure itself, such as the board itself becoming thicker or the insulating layer easily peeling off. In addition, the material for the insulating layer can be selected without considering the heat-sensitive film. In addition, the part where the heat-sensitive film is placed is further protected by a transparent plate, and the unique information can be rewritten even in that state, so the heat-sensitive film part can be further protected while maintaining the advantage that the unique information is rewritable. It can be strongly protected. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a substrate configuration with higher reliability while reducing manufacturing costs.

(9) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The transparent plate is characterized in that at least a portion of its back side is in close contact with the insulating layer.
According to this gaming machine, not only can the heat-sensitive film portion be more strongly protected by the insulating layer and the transparent plate, but also the transparent plate can prevent the insulating layer from peeling off easily, reducing the manufacturing cost. It is possible to achieve a board configuration with higher reliability while reducing the amount of noise.

(10) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
In the unique information display section, a plurality of through holes (for example, through holes 549) are formed in the substrate body that penetrate between a surface where the unique information display section is provided and a surface where the unique information display section is not provided. is,
A locking hole is formed in the transparent plate at a position corresponding to the through hole,
The fixing member is a pin member having a body portion inserted into the locking hole and the through hole, and a head portion locked in the locking hole,
The body portion is inserted into the locking hole and the through hole so that the head is locked in the locking hole, and an end portion of the body portion protrudes to a surface where the unique information display portion is not provided. The transparent plate is fixed to the substrate main body by soldering.
According to this gaming machine, since the transparent plate that protects the heat-sensitive film portion can be integrated as a component of the main control board, it is possible to not only protect the heat-sensitive film portion more firmly, but also to Since this can be applied as a single part in a predetermined test (type certification test), it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs while increasing convenience in such situations.

(11) The gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The through hole is characterized in that it is formed as a through hole that can conduct electricity.
According to this gaming machine, the through holes for fixing the transparent plate to the board body also function as through holes, which not only makes it possible to more firmly protect the heat-sensitive film part, but also improves the stability of the board itself. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost and provide a substrate configuration with higher reliability.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

[11. Other expansion examples related to gameplay, etc.]
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the gameplay has been explained by exemplifying the specifications and functions of the first gaming machine, but the specifications and functions related to the gameplay are not limited to those described above. , various changes and expansions are possible. An example of such expansion will be described below, although it is just an example. It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described in this section can be applied to other gaming machines described in this embodiment. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be a combination of these as appropriate.

(One-hit suppression specification with AT added in one game)
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value indicating the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section (here, the difference number, which is the net increase) reaches a specified value (for example, "2400"), It is possible to install a payout number limiter that can perform control to forcibly end the advantageous section and move to the non-advantageous section (end the AT state even if the AT state gaming period remains), and , With the payout number limiter, the lowest point (starting point) is the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous section, and the positive amount from the latest lowest point is counted (in other words, if there is no payout) The count can be decremented if the count is subtracted.

With this configuration, for example, if the counted value is -5000 sheets at the starting point of the AT state, the difference in number of sheets exceeds "5000 sheets + 2400 sheets" (that is, it becomes "7401" sheets or more). The payout limiter will not operate until Therefore, assuming that no limiter other than the payout limiter is installed, if it is decided to start the AT state in such a situation, for example, the AT state will continue until the end of the advantageous section ( (including a mode of continuing intermittently), in effect, the player will be given a benefit of 7,400 AT difference tickets. At this time, for example, it is possible to create a specification that emphasizes the acquisition of a large amount by displaying, for example, ``GET 7400 sheets with AT difference.'' However, if the game is designed so that too many medals can be acquired in one game, there is a risk that the gambling nature cannot be appropriately suppressed.

Therefore, the AT that can be granted in the AT granting process in one game (including not only the process of determining to grant AT status (initial hit) but also the process of determining to extend (add on) AT status) It is desirable to have a design that limits the expected value (difference in the number of sheets) so that it does not exceed a specific value (to suppress the provision of an AT difference number of sheets that exceeds the specific value in a so-called "one hit"). For example, it is desirable to design such that the expected AT value that can be awarded in the AT granting process in one game is 3000 coins or less. Note that the specific value is just an example, and can be set to any value taking into account the ball payout rate, the degree of gambling, etc. For example, it may be set to 2400 sheets, which is the same as the specified value, or may be set to any other value (3600 sheets or 4800 sheets) that exceeds the specified value. Moreover, various modes can be adopted as the mode of application.

For example, if the AT status is managed by the number of differential sheets (difference number management), it is sufficient to prevent the AT differential number of more than 3,000 coins from being given, or if the AT condition is managed by the number of games (game In the case of number management), the expected value of the net increase in the number of coins per game is considered, and if this is, for example, 3 coins per game, the number of AT games exceeding 1000 games may not be granted. For example, when the AT status is managed by the number of sets (in the case of set number management), the number of games per set is also considered, and this is, for example, 100 games per set (as mentioned above, the net increase per game is If the expected value of the number of sheets is 3, then it is sufficient to prevent the number of sets exceeding 10 from being provided.

This technical idea can be summarized as follows, for example.
In a gaming machine equipped with a difference number limiter (for example, a payout number limiter) that ends the advantageous section when the gaming value increases beyond a specified value (for example, 2400 coins) from the start of the advantageous section,
The number of decreases in the gaming value (for example, the number of coins drawn from the start of the advantageous section (the number of losing coins on the player's side)) counted by the difference counter (for example, the advantageous section payout counter) used in the difference limiter is a predetermined value. (for example, 5,000 coins), the expected value of the gaming value during the AT state that can be awarded in the AT granting process for one game is less than or equal to a specific value (for example, 3,000 coins) that is less than the predetermined value. It is configured as follows,
In a gaming machine, the value obtained by adding the predetermined value and the specified value (for example, 7400 coins) may exceed the specific value.
According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress the gambling nature.

(Expression regulations related to one-shot suppression specifications)
As mentioned above, from the perspective of suppressing gambling, it is desirable that the expected AT value given in one game (here, the AT difference number of coins as an example) does not exceed a specific value (here, 3000 coins as an example). Also, from a similar point of view, an effect that notifies you that an AT difference number of more than 3,000 sheets has been awarded in one game (for example, an effect such as the above-mentioned "AT difference number of 7400 sheets GET", hereinafter referred to as "one-shot effect") It is also desirable to avoid this.

By the way, even under such restrictions, although it is not actually given in one game (for example, it is given as a cumulative result of several games), in terms of the presentation, it ends up being given in one game. There is a possibility that a notification will be made that makes it appear as if an AT difference number of more than 3,000 sheets has been given. However, if such notification may cause the player to mistakenly believe that an AT differential number of more than 3000 coins has been awarded in one game, such notification may fall under the category of one-hit effect. Therefore, in order for the above-mentioned restrictions to function appropriately (to appropriately suppress the gambling nature), it is desirable that performance expressions that may fall under such one-hit performance are also restricted (not executed).

Here, an example of a performance expression that may correspond to a one-shot performance will be described below. Here, for example, there is a grant period between 3 games in which the AT difference number is given, and the AT difference number is given in each of the 1st to 3rd games (for example, 1200 AT difference numbers are given in each game). In the third game, it is assumed that an AT difference number of more than 3000 sheets (for example, 3600 sheets) has been awarded.

In the first production example, in the first and second games, only the fact that you have stayed within the granting period (or only that the AT difference number of sheets has been granted) is announced, and in the third game, the same notification is announced. After this is performed, it is an effect expression in which it is reported that the AT difference number of sheets granted during the grant period was 3600 sheets (result notification is performed). In this case, since there is no specific notification of the number of AT difference awarded other than the result notification, when looking at the final result notification, it is mistakenly assumed that 3600 AT difference number was awarded in one hit. There is a risk. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the result notification in this case corresponds to a one-shot performance, it is desirable that such performance expressions be restricted.

In addition, even if the expression is similar, for example, in the above result notification, "1st game: plus 1200 pieces, 2nd game: plus 1200 pieces, 3rd game: plus 1200 pieces, total: plus 3600 pieces" For example, if a specific announcement is made regarding the number of AT differentials awarded in each game during the granting period, and the announcement of the result of the game concerned is an expression that can be fully recognized as merely indicating the cumulative total. For example, there is no possibility that this falls under the category of one-shot performance, and it is considered that there is no need to limit it.

In the second example, in the first and second games, it is announced that an AT difference number of 1200 sheets has been awarded in each game (progress notification is carried out), and in the third game, the same progress is made. This is an effect expression in which, after the notification is made, it is notified that the AT difference number of sheets granted in the grant period was 3600 sheets (result notification is performed). In this case, since the progress report specifically informs about the number of AT differences awarded, there is a risk that even if you look at the final result notification, you may misunderstand that 3,600 AT differences were awarded in one shot. I don't think so. Therefore, it is considered that there is no need to limit such performance expressions.

As shown in the second production example, for example, if the AT-related benefits granted in each game are less than a specific amount (for example, the AT difference number of sheets is 1200 sheets, where the expected AT value is less than 3000 sheets), After being notified in the game, it will be announced that the total amount of benefits in a series of additional periods (granting periods) will exceed a certain amount (for example, a message will be displayed stating that you will get a TOTAL of 3,600 pieces, which exceeds the expected AT value of 3,000 pieces). By using expressions such as this, it is possible to prevent players from misperceiving that they have been awarded more than a certain amount of benefits in one game, and to appropriately suppress excessive gambling, while also appropriately controlling the amount of benefits that have been received. This has the effect of making it easier for people to understand. Note that this also applies to other examples of performance expressions described as not being limited in this section.

For example, in the above progress notification, even if there is no specific notification regarding the number of AT differences awarded, there may be notifications that can suggest that the number of AT differences awarded is increasing in stages (for example, the number of AT differences awarded). The number is added, or the meter increases, etc.), and the result is announced based on that (for example, the jewels acquired in different unit games are broken one by one, and the AT difference number is added. (or numbers representing the AT difference number are sequentially written on the meter scale, etc.), there is no risk of this falling under one-shot performance, and it is considered that there is no need to limit it.

(Change specifications of AT imparting performance with reference to the number of sheets sucked)
When the payout number limiter is configured and installed as described above, for example, when the counted value is minus 1000 coins at the starting point of the start of the AT state (the number of sucked coins (the number of coins lost by the player)) is 1000 pieces), the payout number limiter does not operate until the difference number exceeds ``1000 pieces + 2400 pieces'' (that is, becomes ``3401'' pieces or more). Also, for example, when the counted value is -5000 sheets at the starting point of the AT state start (when the number of sheets sucked is 5000 sheets), the difference in the number of sheets exceeds "5000 sheets + 2400 sheets" (that is, " The payout number limiter does not operate until the number of payout pieces exceeds 7401 pieces.

In other words, assuming that no limiter other than the payout limiter is installed, the number of payouts will be lower when a larger number of coins have been sucked in at the starting point of the AT state (when the negative value of the counted value is larger). As the limiter operates more slowly, the number of game values that can be acquired during the same advantageous period increases. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the AT application performance is changed depending on the number of sheets sucked. In addition to the payout number limiter, this gaming machine is equipped with a game number limiter (for example, one that activates the limiter after 3,000 games or 4,000 games have passed) that ends the advantageous period according to the number of games that have passed since the start of the advantageous period. However, the AT application performance may be similarly changed depending on the number of sheets sucked. As a result of considering the net increase in the number of coins per game in the AT state and the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous period due to the game limiter, the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous period is ensured to the extent that the AT state will not be terminated midway. This is because it can be said that the larger the number of drawn coins, the longer it takes for the player to operate the payout number limiter.

For example, when the number of tickets sucked is relatively large, the AT winning probability is higher than when the number of tickets sucked is relatively small. The degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be increased, such as by increasing the value). In the above example, when the number of sheets sucked in is 5000 sheets, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be higher than when the number of sheets sucked in is 1000 sheets. Moreover, various aspects can be adopted to increase the degree of advantage. For example, it is possible to adopt only (a) or only (b). Furthermore, both (a) and (b) can also be adopted. Note that when the number of sheets to be sucked in is relatively small, the degree of advantage in the AT applying process is higher than when the number of sheets to be sucked in is relatively large, so that the number of sheets to be sucked in may be prevented from becoming extremely large.

Furthermore, a special AT state may be provided that can be entered only when the number of sheets sucked in is equal to or greater than a specific number. For example, it may be possible to win a special AT state of 3,000 coins in one hit only when 600 coins or more are drawn.

In addition, when changing the AT application performance according to the number of sheets sucked, for example, the threshold value of the number of sheets sucked ( The degree of advantage of the AT granting process may be changed by referring to different AT lottery tables depending on the AT lottery table (range). In this case, even when the count value starting from the start of the advantageous section is positive (the number of sheets sucked becomes negative), the threshold (range) of the net increase number of sheets (or the number of sheets sucked that becomes a negative value) Even if the degree of advantage of AT granting processing is changed by referring to different AT lottery tables (for example, different tables for net increase numbers of 0 to 500, 501 to 1000, and 1001 to 2400) depending on the good. In this case, the degree of advantage in the AT granting process may be increased when the number of net additions is relatively small than when the number of net additions is relatively large.

Further, the method of changing the degree of advantage of AT provision processing is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing a different AT lottery table, a variable (for example, the lottery value itself, or a predetermined calculation for performing a predetermined calculation on the standard lottery value) according to the number of tickets drawn (or the number of increased tickets) can be used. AT application performance may be changed by defining a value (which may be a value) and performing AT application processing with reference to that value. The AT grant processing method itself is arbitrary, and methods other than those described above may be employed as long as they change the AT grant performance according to the sucking situation and can realize a variety of gaming features.

(Production related to change specifications of AT imparting performance with reference to the number of sheets sucked)
At any time during the advantageous period (for example, at regular intervals in the non-AT state, when CZ fails in the CZ state, when AT non-transition is indicated in continuous performance, when the AT state ends, as described above) When the threshold value (range) of the number of sheets to be sucked changes, etc., an effect that can suggest or notify the current number of sheets to be sucked may be executed. In addition, in this production, the current number of sucked sheets (including its range and how many sheets or more (or fewer) it is) may be definitively announced, or it may not be a definitive notification. However, the current number of sheets sucked may be predicted based on the appearance frequency or mode.

If such an effect can be executed, even if the stay in the non-AT state becomes longer, it can be predicted that the AT granting performance will increase if it is suggested or announced that the number of sheets sucked is large. Therefore, it is possible to increase the desire and anticipation of the game without reducing the interest in the game. On the other hand, when it is suggested or notified that the number of drawn coins is small, the player can be given the option of quitting the game, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, from the viewpoint of enhancing the gameplay, in the above performance, the number of staying games (staying period) during the advantageous section may be suggested or announced instead of or in addition to the number of sucked coins. Further, the number of games that were in a non-AT state during the advantageous period (non-AT period) or the number of games that were in an AT state during the advantageous period (AT period) may be suggested or announced. In this way, for example, the current number of sucked coins can be predicted while taking into account the gaming data displayed on the data display installed at the gaming parlor, the gaming data published by the gaming parlor on its website, etc. This has the effect of giving people the pleasure of doing so.

At any time after the opening of the gaming parlor (for example, immediately after the opening of the gaming parlor (first game, 100th game, etc.), when CZ fails in the first CZ state, AT non-transition in the first consecutive performance is indicated, when the first AT state ends, when the above-mentioned threshold (range) of the number of tickets to be sucked changes for the first time, etc. It is preferable that the timing occurs as soon as possible after the opening of the gaming parlor. ), an effect that can suggest or notify whether or not a setting change has been made may be performed. In addition, in this production, it may be possible to definitively notify that a setting change has been made, or although it is not a definitive notification, it is possible to predict whether a setting change has been made based on the appearance frequency and manner. It may be something that does.

For example, when a setting change is made, assuming that the advantageous section ends and moves to a non-advantageous section, and the number of sucked sheets is also initialized, such an effect will be executed and the setting change will be performed. If this is suggested or announced, it can be predicted that the previous day's number of downloaded sheets has not been carried over, and if it is suggested or announced that no settings changes have been made, it can be predicted that the previous day's number of downloaded sheets has not been carried over. Since it is possible to predict, as mentioned above, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current number of tickets to be sucked in, and it is also possible to provide a highly strategic game experience. This has the effect of promoting operation. Note that the game parlor may be able to set whether or not such a performance is to be performed using a hall menu or the like. If such a performance (for example, this is referred to as a ``settings-deferment-suggestion performance'') is set to be unexecutable, this has the effect of making it difficult for the player to detect the setting change. On the other hand, if the setting is set to be executable, the player will be able to obtain useful information (hints that will lead to winning), which will give the player an image that the gaming parlor is a good parlor. Therefore, it has the effect of increasing the ability to attract customers.

The advantageous period ends (or has ended) at a time when the advantageous period can (or may) end (for example, when the AT state ends, when 32 games have been played after the end of the AT state, etc.). It may also be possible to perform an effect that can suggest or notify whether or not the event is true. In addition, in this production, it is possible to definitively notify that the relevant advantageous section has ended (or has ended), or although it is not a definitive notification, the relevant advantageous section may end depending on the frequency and manner of appearance ( Alternatively, it may be possible to predict whether or not the process has ended.

For example, assuming a specification in which the above-mentioned section lamp (status display section) is not provided, if such an effect is executed and it is suggested or announced that the advantageous section will end (or has ended), It can be predicted that the number of sucked pieces will not be carried over in subsequent games, and if it is suggested or announced that the relevant advantageous period has not ended, it can be predicted that the number of sucked pieces will be carried over in subsequent games. become.

Therefore, if the stay in the non-AT state becomes long and the transition to the AT state ends immediately, it will not be suggested or announced that the advantageous section has not ended. For example, since it is possible to predict that the AT granting performance is increasing, it is possible to increase the desire and anticipation of the game without reducing the interest in the game. On the other hand, if a certain amount of gaming value is acquired in the AT state, if it is suggested or announced that the advantageous section will end (or has ended), the AT granting performance will not increase depending on the number of sucked coins. Since this can be predicted, in this case, the player can be given the option of quitting the game, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming addicted to the game.

As mentioned above, even if the configuration is such that there is no section lamp (status display section) that is controlled by the main side, the sub-side that is controlled by the sub-side is designed to be able to perform the above-mentioned effects. A configuration may also be adopted in which a section lamp (sub-side status display section) is provided. Note that the sub-side section lamp starts lighting when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, or when the AT state first starts in an advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends and the vehicle shifts to a non-advantageous section. It may be controlled in the same manner as the section lamp controlled on the main side, such as turning off when the lamp is turned off, or it may be controlled in a manner different from this. This has the effect that a program related to section ramp control is not required on the main side, and free space for data on the main side can be increased. In addition, by appropriately suggesting or informing the player regarding the stay in the advantageous section, it is possible to realize a variety of game features that incorporate guessing of the number of tickets sucked in and the reset status of the advantageous section.

For example, when the AT state ends, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to turn off the light even if the advantageous section does not end, and if the winning is won, the light is turned off, or when the AT state ends, the light is turned off. A lottery is held as to whether or not to keep the lights on even when the section ends, and if you win, the lights will remain on. It may be possible to have a behavior different from that of a lamp, so that the gameplay becomes more diverse. Note that the above effects can be performed using various existing effect devices without providing such sub-section lamps. That is, the various effects described in this section can be executed by any effect execution means as long as they can be appropriately suggested or notified to the player.

(Lamp indicating external signal output)
As described above, in this embodiment, multiple types of external signals can be output to the outside via the external terminal board (the external centralized terminal board 55 shown in FIG. 3 or the game ball etc. connection terminal board 443 shown in FIG. 36). However, when an external signal is output, one of the lamps controlled by the main control board (main control board 71 or main control board 411) is turned on as an external signal output lamp. It is desirable to be able to visually check from the outside whether there are any errors in the external signal output.

Therefore, when the configuration is such that a section lamp controlled on the main side is provided as in this embodiment, for example, when outputting a signal indicating the AT state from an external terminal board, the section lamp is also used as an external signal output lamp, and the corresponding section lamp is used as an external signal output lamp. A configuration may be adopted in which the output of the external signal can be visually recognized by lighting the section lamp. On the other hand, as described above, in the case of a configuration in which the section lamp (status display section) controlled by the main side is not provided, an external signal output lamp that makes the output of the external signal visible may be separately provided.

In either configuration, it is possible to confirm whether an external signal is being output from the lighting of a predetermined lamp, so the store side (for example, a hall computer, etc.) This has the effect of improving convenience for the operator when checking whether signals from the gaming machine are being properly received. For example, when the predetermined lamp is lit, if the hall computer cannot detect the external signal output from that machine, the harness for receiving the external signal (for example, the connection between the gaming machine and the hall computer) It is possible to detect problems such as the harness that connects the sand, the communication device, and the hall computer of a medalless gaming machine, etc., that are not connected correctly or that there is an internal disconnection.

(Special termination function that refers to the number of MY from when the power is turned on)
As described above, in this embodiment, when a predetermined operating condition is met, a discontinuing function is provided that disables gaming until a cancellation operation (for example, setting change) by the manager of the game parlor or initialization due to a RAM abnormality is performed. However, in order to appropriately suppress the gambling nature, it is also possible to install, for example, the following special stopping function.

The special stoppage function is based on the time when the number of medals at the end of each game is the lowest from the time the power is turned on, and the number of medals increased from the standard (this is referred to as "MY") is 19,000 (this value can be set arbitrarily). (which can be changed), the game becomes disabled. In addition, if the operating conditions for the special stop function are met during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device or the first-class special accessory, the game will be disabled when the accessory continuous operation device or the first-class special accessory ends. It is also possible to do so.

Furthermore, it is desirable that a gaming machine equipped with a special stopping function not be equipped with a normal stopping function. Here, the normal discontinuation function is a discontinuation function that is set in advance by the game parlor to enable the discontinuation function, for example, a discontinuation function that disables play when the bonus operation ends (such as a store operation where medals are settled with one bonus payment). ). This is because if it is possible to install both stoppage functions, players will not know which one is activated when a stoppage occurs, causing confusion for the players, which may lead to trouble between the players and the game parlor. Please note that the special no-stop function is not a function for the convenience of the game parlor like the normal no-stop function, but is a function to suppress the gambling nature, so it is not possible for the game parlor to turn off the function. It is desirable to do so. For example, in a gaming machine equipped with a special stop-stop function, an operating means for changing the stop-stop setting, such as an on/off switch for the stop-stop function, may not be provided inside the casing.

Note that MY is desirably calculated every game between when all reels stop and when a bet operation becomes possible. It should be noted that during the re-gaming operation, since there is no change in the difference in the number of coins, it is sufficient that MY is not updated. Furthermore, in order to enable aggregation on a business day basis, MY may be initialized only when the power is turned on (including when the RAM is abnormal or when settings are changed). Further, the operating state of the special stoppage function (that is, the game disabled state) may be initialized (reset) only when the RAM is abnormal or when the settings are changed. Here, game arcades do not normally perform setting changes or power outage recovery work during business hours, so if the special stop function is activated during one business day, the machine will remain unplayable until the store closes. becomes. Therefore, the player settles the medals and ends the game at that machine. As a result, in the extremely rare case that a large number of medals (19,000 medals in this case) are acquired, the game can be stopped, which has the effect of suppressing the gambling nature.

(Special suspension notification status)
When the special stoppage function is activated, a special stoppage notification state can be set in order to notify the player and the gaming parlor that the game cannot be continued. In the special no-stop notification state, it is desirable that the performance display section or the like display a display indicating that the special no-go function has been activated, such as, for example, "The no-go function has been activated. The game is over for today." By displaying this kind of information, it is possible to clearly communicate to players and store staff the reasons and circumstances surrounding the suspension of gaming, thereby preventing troubles between players and gaming parlors. be effective. In addition, since it becomes impossible to play after such a special stop function is activated, the display indicating that the special stop function has been activated can continue until the power is turned off, and the demonstration screen (waiting for customers) screen) may not be performed (demonstration status notification may not be performed).

Further, in addition to this, the sound output mode of the speaker and the light emission mode of the lamp may be set to a pattern corresponding to the special discontinuation notification state. For example, the speaker may output a voice saying "Special stop function has been activated" for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1 minute), or the lamp may be set to a predetermined state (off, blinking, etc.) to end the game. You may also suggest. In addition, sounds that suggest or notify the activation of the special stop function (sound effects, voices, etc.) must be output at a specific volume (for example, a reasonably high volume such as 90 db) without being affected by the volume adjustment function. is desirable. Since the cancellation is important information for the player, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event where the sound related to the notification is too low to be heard.

Furthermore, if a predetermined condition (power-saving state transition condition) is satisfied during the operation of the special stop function, the gaming machine that has become unable to play may thereafter enter the power-saving state. A power-saving state means that the brightness of the production display (e.g., the display screen of a liquid crystal display device) is reduced or not displayed, the brightness of the light emitting means (e.g., decorative lamps, waist panels, reel lamps, etc.) is reduced or turned off, and the output from the speakers is reduced or turned off. This is a state in which the volume is reduced or the sound is stopped when there is sound. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of gaming machines that cannot play games, and this has the effect of leading to cost reductions (saving electricity costs) at gaming parlors and improvement of environmental performance. In addition, customers can tell at a glance that the game is not in the normal state (playable state), so if a customer accidentally tries to hit the game-stopped table, he or she can insert cash or medals into the corresponding sand. This has the effect of avoiding troubles such as Note that the following conditions can be used as the power saving state transition conditions, for example.

For example, activation of the special termination function can be used as the condition for transitioning to the power saving state. That is, it is a mode in which the power saving state is entered at the time of activation of the special stop function (strictly speaking, it can also be said that the power saving state is entered in response to the activation of the special stop state without any particular transition conditions). This has the effect of further improving power saving performance.

Also, for example, it is possible to indicate that a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.; it can be any period of time that the player considers necessary for the player to finish the game) has elapsed since the activation of the special stoppage function. It can be used as a power saving state transition condition. Also, for example, after the special stoppage function is activated and a specific condition (for example, a condition that is considered to be the end of the game, such as the end of the player's operation, the end of payout, or the end of payment) is established, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes, etc.) may be set. It is possible to use the elapse of a period of time (which can be set as time as described above) as a condition for transitioning to a power saving state. As a result, for example, the machine can be placed in a power saving state after the time considered necessary for the player to leave the seat, so that it is less likely to leave a bad impression on the player. Note that these power-saving state transition conditions are just examples, and conditions other than these can also be used as power-saving state transition conditions.

In addition, the performance display section displays a two-dimensional code for information provision services using the player's mobile terminal (for example, a two-dimensional code for logout) as well as a display indicating that the special stop function has been activated. Good too. In addition, a two-dimensional code may be automatically displayed on the display screen to indicate that the special stop function has been activated, or even when the special stop function is activated, an operation to call up the user menu (for example, a production button) The configuration may also be such that a user menu can be displayed according to the operation, and a two-dimensional code can be displayed by the operation on the user menu. With such a configuration, even if the game is discontinued, the player can collect his/her gaming history, etc., so that it is possible to maintain interest and improve convenience.

(External signal output due to special stopping function activation)
When the special stopping function is activated, a predetermined external signal may be output from the above-mentioned external terminal board. For example, an external signal as a security signal is output from a predetermined terminal (for example, a terminal with PIN number 6) for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) or more, and an external data display or hall computer is also used to detect security-related events. It may be possible to make it possible to understand that this has occurred.

(Advance notification of special stop state activation)
By the way, if the special suspension state suddenly activates and the game becomes impossible, even if the AT difference number of cards etc. remains, the game will not be able to continue at that point, so there is a risk that the special suspension state will be activated unexpectedly. If so, it may reduce the desire to play. Therefore, in order to make the player aware in advance that the special no-stop state will be activated and the game will be disabled, it is desirable to notify the player in advance before the special no-go function is activated.

For example, when the MY counter for the special stop function reaches a specific number (for example, 18,500 sheets), by displaying a message such as "500 sheets remaining until the special stop function activates" on the production display section, the special stop function can be activated. It is sufficient to provide advance notice that the operation of the system is imminent. Note that, once the advance notice is started, it may be configured that the advance notice can be continued until the special discontinuation function is activated. In this case, when medals are acquired or consumed, the display of the number of medals remaining until the special stoppage function is activated is updated, and a state in which the conditions until the special stoppage function is activated can be maintained is maintained. In addition, if a special discontinuation function is activated when the bonus operation ends while the bonus is in operation (while the accessory continuous activation device or the first class special accessory is in operation), the special discontinuation function will be activated when the bonus ends. It is also possible to provide advance notice to the effect that the service will be discontinued at the following date. In this way, the timing for stopping the game becomes clear and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

However, during advance notification, if the medal increase period such as AT or bonus ends and the medal decrease period such as the so-called normal time occurs, and the value of the above MY counter also falls below 18,500 medals, advance notification will be issued. (Also, in this case, the condition for ending advance notification may be a different number of sheets than the condition for starting advance notification (for example, MY18,000 sheets)). Alternatively, once advance notification has been started, advance notification shall continue until the special stoppage function is activated, and other players (for example, players who will play the game machine from now on) will be informed that the special stoppage state is about to be activated. It may also be configured so that it can be recognized even by players who are considering playing games. Note that the latter specification has the effect that even if the player changes, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unexpected damage due to the activation of the special stoppage function. Further, if the power is interrupted during the advance notification, the value of the MY counter described above is initialized, and therefore, after the power is restored, the advance notification will be in a state where it has ended.

Further, the payout number limiter may also be provided with similar prior notification. For example, when the counter of the payout number limiter reaches a specific number (for example, 2300 pieces), displaying a message such as "100 pieces remaining until the payout number limiter is activated" on the production display section allows the payout number limiter to be activated. It is sufficient to give advance notice that the date is near. Further, if both a special stop function and a payout number limiter are installed, advance notification may be provided for both. For example, if the MY counter above reaches a specific number (for example, 18,500 pieces) and the counter of the payout number limiter reaches a specific number (for example, 2,300 pieces), the message "There are 500 pieces left until the special stop function activates. '', and a message such as ``100 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated'' may be displayed on the effect display section.

In this case, if you continue playing the game, the payout limiter will operate first and the AT state will end, but since the above MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) by the payout limiter, the special The situation will continue with only 400 sheets remaining until the stoppage function is activated. Therefore, in such a case, the display such as "100 coins remaining until the payout limiter is activated" should be terminated, but the display such as "400 coins remaining until the special stop function is activated" may continue to be displayed. . In this case, as mentioned above, if the value of the above MY counter falls below 18,500 sheets (if the condition for ending advance notification is different from the condition for starting advance notification, then the number of sheets that is the condition for ending advance notification ), the prior notification may be terminated, or once the advance notification is started, the advance notification may be continued until the special termination function is activated.

By the way, there are situations where it is certain that the special stop function is activated before the payout number limiter is activated, such as 50 coins remaining until the special stop function is activated and 100 sheets remaining until the payout number limiter is activated. Here, on the premise that the increase in medals is determined by at least 50 medals remaining in the AT state, the number of medals acquired that is the pre-notification condition for the activation of the special stop function (for example, starting from the lowest point from when the power is turned on) 18,500 coins or more) and the number of acquired coins (for example, 2,300 coins or more starting from the start of the advantageous section) that is the pre-notification condition for activation of the payout number limiter. In such a situation, a configuration may be adopted in which both advance notification of the activation of the special stop function and advance notification of the activation of the payout number limiter are displayed. This has the effect that the player can accurately grasp the situation.

In addition, in such a situation, the payout limiter will not operate if the special stop function is activated first, so only advance notification of the special stop function is activated, and no advance notification of the payout limiter is activated. It may be absent. Information regarding limiters that do not operate is not necessarily information that is necessary for players, and considering that notifications such as press order navigation are often performed especially in AT state, it is better not to increase the number of display items too much. This is because it can be said that the player can comfortably overcome the AT state. In other words, it is possible to suppress information overload. In addition, even in machines that are not equipped with the effect display unit described below, in situations where both the advance notification of the special stop function activation and the advance notification of the payout number limiter activation can be displayed, information regarding the limiter that will not operate is hidden. Good too.

(Advance notification of special stop state activation on machines not equipped with a performance display unit)
Some gaming machines of this type are not equipped with the above-mentioned effect display section, but even machines without such an effect display section can be equipped with a special stopping function. It is thought that some kind of device must be devised in order to perform the above-mentioned advance notification. An example of such a method will be described below. In addition, in order to more clearly notify the special stop state operation in advance, the following method may be adopted even in a gaming machine provided with the effect display section as described above.

For example, there is a method of using the above-mentioned information display device 14 controlled by the main side as a display means capable of performing advance notification. Specifically, the above-mentioned payout lamp composed of two-digit 7-segment LEDs is used to display the number of medals that have been paid out (number of payouts), or to display information on stop operations to the player. The above-mentioned instruction monitor (notification lamp) composed of two-digit 7-segment LEDs is used.

When the value of the above MY counter reaches 18,500 sheets, for example, "L5" is displayed on the display means ("L" means an identifier to be described later). This means that there are 500 sheets remaining until the special stop function is activated. The display continues until the next display content is updated. Next, when the value of the above MY counter reaches 18,600 sheets, for example, "L4" is displayed on the display means. This means that there are 400 sheets left until the special stop function is activated. The display continues until the next display content is updated. In this way, the number of remaining sheets until the special stopping function is activated is updated in units of 100 sheets (this unit can be changed arbitrarily).

For example, when the value of the above MY counter becomes 18,700 sheets, "L3" is displayed on the display means, and when the value of the above MY counter becomes 18,800 sheets, "L2" is displayed on the display means. When the value of the above MY counter reaches 18,900 sheets, "L1" is displayed on the display means. Incidentally, when the value of the MY counter mentioned above reaches 19,000 sheets, the special stop function actually operates.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned payout lamp, the number of coins to be paid out is displayed during payout, so such advance notification cannot be executed all the time, but it is possible to continue advance notification at least during non-gaming periods. Even if the player changes, unexpected damage caused by the activation of the special stoppage function can be suppressed. In the above-mentioned instruction monitor (notification lamp), if information on a stop operation is notified in the game, the instruction information is displayed during the game, so such advance notification cannot always be performed, but at least Similar to the above, advance notification can be continued during non-gaming. That is, it is considered that problems are unlikely to occur even with such a configuration of the display means.

Further, for example, as a display means that can execute advance notification, a display device configured on a 3-digit 7-segment LED, which is controlled by the sub-side and is used to display information on a stop operation to the player, may be used. This is a method that uses

For example, when the value of the above MY counter reaches 18,500 sheets, "L50" is displayed on the display means, and when the value of the above MY counter becomes 18,600 sheets, "L40" is displayed on the display means. When the value of the above MY counter reaches 18,700 sheets, "L30" is displayed on the display means, and when the value of the above MY counter reaches 18,800 sheets, "L30" is displayed on the display means. "L20" is displayed, and when the value of the MY counter mentioned above reaches 18,900 sheets, "L10" is displayed on the display means. In addition, similar to the display means on the main side, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the number of remaining coins until the special stop function is activated is updated sequentially in units of 100 coins. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the above information is updated sequentially.

In addition, when adopting the latter mode, for example, when the value of the above MY counter reaches 18,500 pieces, "500" is displayed on the display means, and if there is a net increase of 10 pieces in the next game. If there is a net increase of 10 coins in the next game, "480" may be displayed on the display means.

In addition, in the above-mentioned display device, when information on a stop operation is announced in the game, since the information on the stop operation is displayed during the game, such advance notification cannot be performed all the time, but at least Similar to the above, advance notification can be continued during non-gaming. That is, it is considered that problems are unlikely to occur even with such a configuration of the display means.

Further, a display device exclusively for advance notification may be provided, which is configured with a four-digit, seven-segment LED and controlled on the sub-side. For example, when the value of the MY counter above reaches 18,500 pieces, "L500" is displayed on the display means, and when there is a net increase of 10 pieces in the next game, "L490" is displayed on the display means. ", and if there is a net increase of 10 coins in the next game, the display will display "L480", etc., and the display contents will be updated sequentially according to the actual number of coins paid out. Bye. In addition, since the display device is exclusively for advance notification, advance notification can be executed at all times regardless of the gaming situation.

While performing the advance notification described above, the special cancellation function may be activated after the value of the MY counter exceeds 19,000 sheets, which is the scheduled number of sheets to be canceled, due to bonus activation. For example, there is a case where a bonus of 200 coins is activated when the value of the MY counter is 18,900 coins. In such a case, after the value of the above-mentioned MY counter exceeds 19,000 sheets, the above-mentioned display means (here, we will explain using the display device exclusively for advance notification consisting of the above-mentioned 4-digit 7-segment LED) ), for example, a display such as "L000" may be displayed and this may be maintained until the end of the bonus, or a dedicated display such as "L_BB" indicating that the bonus will be discontinued when the bonus ends, This may be maintained until the end of the bonus.

Note that this also applies to gaming machines provided with an effect display section. For example, in a similar situation, after the value of the MY counter above exceeds 19,000 coins, the message ``The game ends with 〇〇〇 coins remaining'' will end, and the message ``The game will end when this bonus ends'' will be displayed. You may also display something like this. Further, in this case, the number of coins to be paid out until the end of the bonus, the number of games, etc. may be displayed together with such a display. By performing such a display, it is possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(When performing advance notification of special stop state activation and advance notification of payout number limiter activation on a machine not equipped with a production display unit)
As mentioned above, if both the special stop function and the payout limiter are installed, in a gaming machine equipped with an effect display section (for example, a liquid crystal display device, etc.), (a) special stop state activation will be displayed on the display screen. It is possible to display both advance notification and (b) advance notification of payout number limiter activation.

Here, when the special discontinuation function is installed on a machine not equipped with a production display section, the device for providing advance notification in (b) is as described above, but the special discontinuation function can also be applied to a machine not equipped with a production display section. Since both the function and the payout number limiter can be installed, in that case, it is considered necessary to further devise (b) to provide advance notification. An example of such a method will be described below. Note that, similar to the above, even if the gaming machine is provided with an effect display section, advance notification may be performed using the following method.

First of all, even if the machine is not equipped with a performance display section, for example, the first display section (7 segment LED with about 2 to 4 digits) and the second display section (7 segment LED with about 2 to 4 digits), which is different from this, ), and if the advance notice can be displayed on each, display the advance notice in (a) on the first display part, display the advance notice in (b) on the second display part, etc. A) and (b) can be displayed simultaneously. Note that as the first display section and the second display section, for example, any of the display means described above can be used, respectively. Furthermore, in this case, the identifier and display mode can be made different as described later.

On the other hand, in machines that are not equipped with a performance display unit, if the machine is equipped with multiple display units but only one display unit can be used for advance notification, or if it is equipped with only one display unit, advance notification of the activation of the special stop function may be provided. In a state where both the condition and the advance notification condition for activation of the payout number limiter are satisfied, it is necessary to devise a method for displaying either (a) or (b).

When displaying one of them, for example, as described above, the prior notification of the one that is activated first can be given priority. In other words, if the special discontinuation function operates before the payout number limiter, advance notification of (b) will be given, and if the dispensation number limiter operates before the special discontinuation function, ( It is also possible to provide advance notification of (b). This has the effect of being able to broadcast more suitable information.

Also, for example, the display contents may be switched from (a) to (b), (b) to (b) every time a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, so that both can be switched automatically without the player having to operate. The display may be visible. Note that the switching may occur only while waiting for the game (for example, from the end of the payout until the next game start operation), or during the game (for example, from after the start operation until the time the payout ends). , both may be used. Also, while waiting for games, players may change places, so during waiting for games, display of (a) is given priority over display of (b) ((b) is not displayed), and while waiting for games, (b) is not displayed. The display of (b) may be given priority over the display of (b) ((b) is not displayed). Or it may be the other way around. Alternatively, in either period, both (a) and (b) may be switched and displayed as described above.

Further, for example, the display of (a) and (b) may be switchable based on the player's switching operation rather than the passage of time. In this case, if the display section is controlled by the main side, it is possible to operate any operation means that does not affect the progress of the game, such as a bet operation during the game (for example, pressing the MAX bet button 6a). The display may be changed based on the above.

Further, if the display section is controlled by the sub side, the display may be switched based on the operation of the presentation operation section (for example, presentation button), for example. However, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have an operation section for production, operations on the operation means that can detect operations on the main side (for example, bet operations during a game, start operations while the reels are spinning, or after the reels have stopped) The display may be switched (when the sub side receives the corresponding information) based on an operation that does not affect the progress of the game, such as a stop operation.

Note that operations that can switch the display are not limited to operations that do not affect the progress of the game. The display may be changed based on an operation that affects the progress of the game (for example, a bet operation when no bet is made, a start operation before the reels rotate, a stop operation before the reels stop, etc.). That is, the display may be switched by an operation that does not affect the progress of the game, allowing the player to switch the display at any timing, or the display may be switched by an operation that affects the progress of the game. The display may be switched without requiring any separate operation. Either method has the effect of increasing convenience.

In addition, as another notification mode, for example, the advance notification in (a) is performed on the display, but the advance notification in (b) is, for example, from the speaker saying, ``500 sheets left until limiter activation.'' or ``Limiter activation.'' The notification may be made by outputting a voice such as "We're almost there." Or it may be the other way around. Alternatively, as described above, advance notification of the priority may be provided on the display unit, and advance notification of the non-priority may be provided through the speaker. Further, when advance notification is performed using a speaker, a lamp may be used instead of or in addition to the speaker. This has the effect that more information can be provided even if there is only one display unit that can be used for advance notification. Note that this also applies to the case where the content of advance notification can be changed.

Note that different identifiers may be displayed for the advance notification in (a) and the advance notification in (b). This has the effect of being able to clearly indicate which advance notification is being made. For example, in the advance notification of (a), if there are 500 sheets remaining until the special stop state is activated, "L500" is displayed. On the other hand, in the advance notification (b), if there are 500 coins remaining until the payout number limiter is activated, "H500" is displayed. That is, the "L" and "H" displayed in the first digit of the 7-segment LED serve as identifiers, and even when displaying the same number of remaining sheets, it is possible to recognize that these are different advance notifications. Note that these identifiers are just examples. For example, if it can be displayed with a 7-segment LED and it is possible to recognize that different advance notifications are being performed from the display mode, any letters, numbers, symbols, dot patterns, etc. can be used as the identifier. be able to.

Furthermore, if there is enough digits, an identifier consisting of two or more digits can also be used. For example, an identifier such as "LM" or "SHL" may be used. When using a one-digit identifier, for example, "E", which is easily mistaken for an error notification, and "S", which cannot be distinguished from a number in a segment display (same as "5" in a segment display). , or "O" (which is the same as "0" in SEG) are preferably not used as identifiers.

Further, the advance notification in (a) and the advance notification in (b) may be displayed in different display modes (here, for example, colors). This has the effect of being able to clearly indicate which advance notification is being made. For example, if the segment display can be displayed in a plurality of colors, the advance notification in (a) may be displayed in red, and the advance notification in (b) may be displayed in blue. Note that a combination of the above-mentioned method of differentiating the identifier and method of differentizing the display mode can be adopted, or only one of the methods can be adopted. Furthermore, it is also possible to make the display modes different, for example, such that one is lit and the other is blinking (or the pattern is different).

In the case where the advance notice in (a) and the advance notice in (b) can be displayed with different identifiers or display formats (in the case where only one of the advance notices is given, the identifier or display format is specified) (including cases where the player does so), the player may be configured to be able to confirm how to view the display regarding advance notification. For example, if we take the advance notification in (a) as an example, a message saying "L〇〇 It is sufficient to display an explanation such as "This means the remaining number of sheets." This has the effect of making the content of advance notification easier to understand.

A gaming machine capable of performing any of the advance notifications described above has the effect of suppressing unexpected damage caused by, for example, starting a game and then suddenly stopping the game.

(About volume adjustment)
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker group can be adjusted at least by the player's operation on the user menu, but in addition to this, the configuration also allows the volume to be adjusted on the gaming parlor side. You can also use it as For example, "volume setting" can be selected on the hall menu, which is a menu screen on the game parlor side, and the volume level can be selected here. At least one of the selectable volume levels can be set to a volume that does not generally exceed a predetermined volume value (for example, 85 db) even if the player sets the maximum volume using an operation on the user menu. the volume level.

In this way, even if a player who likes loud sounds plays at maximum volume, the gaming machine will not only take into consideration the gaming environment of nearby players, but also the living environment of game parlor staff, nearby residents, etc. This has the effect of being able to provide the following. Note that the mode in which the game parlor side can set the volume level is not limited to this. For example, a physical switch such as a slide switch or a volume switch may be provided inside or on the back of the housing, and a desired volume level may be selected by operating the switch.

1,401... Pachislot machine, 71,411... Main control board, 72,412... Sub control board, 100... Main control circuit, 101,501... Main CPU, 200... Sub control circuit, 201... Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a gaming value control board that controls the management of gaming value,
The main control board is installed inside the gaming machine while being housed in a transparent main control board case, and has a plurality of codes printed at visible positions in that state,
The gaming value control board is installed inside the gaming machine while being housed in a transparent gaming value control board case different from the main control board case,
The plurality of codes are each configured to be able to specify different unique information, and each of the unique information can be individually made readable or unreadable by a band-like member,
A first code included in the plurality of codes can specify the unique information indicating a first manufacturer,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second code included in the plurality of codes can specify the unique information indicating a second manufacturer.

Images